TW501058B - Data processing device and method, and program recording medium - Google Patents

Data processing device and method, and program recording medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW501058B
TW501058B TW89126393A TW89126393A TW501058B TW 501058 B TW501058 B TW 501058B TW 89126393 A TW89126393 A TW 89126393A TW 89126393 A TW89126393 A TW 89126393A TW 501058 B TW501058 B TW 501058B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
content
program
data
display
operation instruction
Prior art date
Application number
TW89126393A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Toshihiro Morita
Mitsuyuki Hatanaka
Kiyonobu Kojima
Itsupei Tanbata
Makoto Shiroma
Original Assignee
Sony Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sony Corp filed Critical Sony Corp
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW501058B publication Critical patent/TW501058B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Management, Administration, Business Operations System, And Electronic Commerce (AREA)
  • Storage Device Security (AREA)
  • Reverberation, Karaoke And Other Acoustics (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to a data processing device and method, and the program recording medium, and especially relates to a data processing device and method, and program recording medium combining or dividing the contents. The subject of the present invention is: preventing inappropriately damaging the user's right; and both preventing the illegal usage of content and dividing the content. The solution is: the content management program 111 determines if the content is paid; and, if it is determined that the content has not been paid, the content will be divided.

Description

1 fKg A7 _——__B7^__ 五、發明說明（1 ) 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明係關於資訊處理裝置及方法、以及程式收容媒 體’特別是關於結合、或分割內容之資訊處理裝置及方法 、以及程式收容媒體。 【習知技術】 個人電腦等之資訊處理裝置透過指定之網路，存取 EMD(Electrical Music Distribution :電氣音樂分布）伺服器 ，可以由EMD伺服器接收音樂資料等之內容。使用者使在 個人電腦接收之內容.^31攜式裝置結帳，單獨帶著內容被 結帳之可攜式裝置，於可攜式裝置可以使之再生內容。 個人電腦可以結合接收之2個之內容、或將接收之1 個之內容分割爲2個之內容。 【發明欲解決之課題】 但是，結合之內容之利用條件不同時，一結合內容， 由於結合後之內容的利用條件，可以利用內容之範圍變廣 ，有內容可以不正當利用之情形。又，由於結合後之內容 的其它之利用條件，可以利用內容之範圍變窄，有使用者 之權力不當受損之情形。 進而，例如，在分割已經被結帳之內容之情形，由於 分割後之內容之利用條件，與結合時同樣地，有內容被不 當利用，或使用者之權力不當受損之情形。 本發明係有鑑於此種狀況而完成者，目的在於：不會 --------------裝—— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 言· -線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 〇 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制π A7 B7 五、發明說明（2 ) 不當損及使用者之權力，又，一面防止不正當之內容的利 用，一面可以結合或分割內容。 【解決課題用之手段】 申請專利範圍第1項記載之資訊處理裝置，其特徵爲 包含：判定第1內容是否被結帳之第1判定手段；以及判 定第2內容是否被結帳之第2判定手段；以及在被判定第 1內容與第2內容皆未被結帳之情形，結合第1內容與第 2內容之結合手段。 申請專利範圍第2項記載之資訊處理方法，其特徵爲 包含：判定第1内容1"否被結帳之第1判定步驟；以及判 定第2內容是否被結帳之第2‘判定步驟；以及在被判定第 1內容與第2內容皆未被結帳之情形，結合第1內容與第 2內容之結合步驟。 申請專利範圍第3項記載之程式收容媒體之程式，其 特徵爲包含：判定第1內容是否被結帳之第1判定步驟； 以及判定第2內容是否被結帳之第2判定步驟；以及在被 判定第1內容與第2內容皆未被結帳之情形，結合第1內 容與第2內容之結合步驟。 申請專利範圍第4項記載之資訊處理裝置，其特徵爲 包含··判定內容是否被結帳之判定手段；以及在被判定內 容未被結帳之情形，分割內容之分割手段。 申請專利範圍第5項記載之資訊處理方法，其特徵爲 包含：判定內容是否被結帳之判定步驟；以及在被判定內 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公髮) f— n n n ϋ ϋ n n ·ϋ ft— ϋ I · flu I Bn n n I ϋ^δ,_ * n n n n n n I 線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 ____ B7 五、發明說明（3 ) 容未被結帳之情形，分割內容之分割步驟。 如申請專利範圍第6項記載之程式收容媒體之程式’ 其特徵爲包含：判定內容是否被結帳之判定步驟；以及在 被判定內容未被結帳之情形，分割內容之分割步驟。 於申請專利範圍第1項記載之資訊處理裝置、申請專 利範圍第2項記載之資訊處理方法、以及申請專利範圍第3 項記載之程式收容媒體中，第1內容是否被結帳被判定， 第2內容是否被結帳被判定，.在被判定第1內容與第2內 容皆未被結帳之情形，第1內容與第2內容被結合。 於申請專利範圍第4項記載之資訊處理裝置、申請專 利範圍第5項記載乏費ΊΓ處理方法、以及申請專利範圍第6 '項記載之程式收容媒體中，內容是否被結帳被判定，在被 判定內容未被結帳之情形，內容被分割。 【發明之實施形態】 圖1係顯示本發明之音樂資料管理系統之一實施形態 之圖。個人電腦1 -1係被接續於由區域網路或網際網路等構 成之網路2。個人電腦1-1將由EMD(Electrical Music D1Stnbution :電氣音樂分布）伺服器4-1至4-3接收，或由 後述之CD(Compact Disc :緻密光碟）讀取之音樂之資料（ 以下，稱爲內容）轉換爲指定之壓縮方式（例如， ATRAC3(商標））之同時，以 DES(Data Encryption Standard :資料加密標準）等之加密方式加密記錄之。 個人電腦1 -1對應加密記錄之內容，記錄顯示內容之利 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝·---- - 訂---II----線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -6- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 ____J37______ 五、發明說明（4 ) 用條件之利用條件之資料。利用條件之資料例如顯示：將 對應該利用條件之資料之內容同時可以在3台之可攜式裝 置（？〇1^1)4〇6¥46(也稱爲？.1))6-1至6-3利用、可以複製 、可以移動於其它之個人電腦等。利用條件之資料的詳情 ，之後敘述。 個人電腦1 -1將加密記錄之內容與關連於內容之資料（ 例如，曲名、再生次數、再生期限、或均衡器資訊等）一 齊地記億於被接續之可攜式裝置6-1之同時，對應使之記憶 於可攜式裝置6-1，更新對應記億之內容之利用條件之資料 (以下，稱爲結帳）。個人電腦1 -1將加密記錄之內容與關 連於內容之資料=齊ΙίΓ記憶於被接續之可攜式裝置6-2之同 -時，對應使之記憶於可攜式裝置6-2，更新對應記憶之內容 之利用條件之資料。個人電腦1 -1將加密記錄之內容與關連 於內容之資料一齊地記憶於被接續之可攜式裝置6-3之同時 ，對應使之記億於可攜式裝置6-3，更新對應記憶之內容之 利用條件之資料。 又’個人電腦1 -1將個人電腦1 -1於被接續之可攜式裝 置6-1結帳之內容由可攜式裝置6_丨消去，更新對應消除之 內容之利用條件之資料（以下，稱爲報到）。個人電腦1 -1 將個人電腦1 -1於被接續之可攜式裝置6 - 2結帳之內容由可 •攜式裝置6-2消去，更新對應消除之內容之利用條件之資料 ’個人電腦1 -1將個人電腦1 -1於被接續之可攜式裝置6-3 結帳之內容由可攜式裝置6-3消去，更新對應消除之內容之 利用條件之資料。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） ---------------------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（5 ) 個人電腦1-1無法報到個人電腦1 -2於可攜式裝置6-1 結帳之內容。個人電腦1 -1無法報到個人電腦1-2於可攜式 裝置6-2結帳之內容。個人電腦1 -1無法報到個人電腦1 -2 於可攜式裝置6-3結帳之內容。 個人電腦1 -2被接續於由區域網路或網際網路等構成之 網路2。個人電腦1-2將由EMD伺服器4-1至4-3接收之、 或由後述之CD讀取之內容轉換爲指定之壓縮之方式之同時 ’以DES等之加密方式給予加密記錄。 個人電腦1 -2對應加密記錄之內容，記錄顯示內容之利 用條件之利用條件之資料。利用條件之資料例如顯示同時 在3台之可攜式爱利用對應其之利用條件之資料之 -內容、可以複製、可以移動於其它之個人電腦等。 個人電腦1 - 2將加密記錄之內容與關連於內容之資料一 齊地記憶於被接續之可攜式裝置6-4，同時，對應記憶於可 攜式裝置6-4，更新對應記憶之內容之利用條件之資料（及 ，結帳）。在有內容之結帳之指示之情形，個人電腦1 -2在 該內容被設定有後述之使用期限或再生次數等時，不將該 內容於可攜式裝置6-4結帳。 又，個人電腦1 -2將個人電腦1 -2於被接續之可攜式裝 置6-4結帳之內容由可攜式裝置6-4消去，更新對應消除之 內容之利用條件之資料。 個人電腦1-2不報到個人電腦1-1於可攜式裝置6-4結 帳之內容。 以下’在沒有特別需要區別個人電腦1 -丨以及個人電腦 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公釐） IIIIIIIIII — — — · I I I I I I I illllllli (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -8 - 501058 Λ7 _________ B7 五、發明說明（6 ) 1 - 2時，單稱爲個人電腦1。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) EMD登錄伺服器3在個人電腦1由EMD伺服器4-1至 4-3開始內容之取得時’對應個人電腦1之要求，透過網路 2 ’對個人電腦1傳送個人電腦1與EMD伺服器4-1至4-3 之相互認證所必要之認證鍵，同時，對個人電腦1傳送接 續於EMD伺服器4-1至4-3用之程式。 EMD伺服器4-1對應個人電腦1之要求，透過網路2與 關連於內容之資料（例如，曲名、再生次數、再生期限、 或均衡器資訊等）一齊地對個人電腦1供給內容。EMD伺 服器4-2對應個人電腦1之要求，透過網路2與關連於內容 之資料一齊地對偏人鼋1窗1供給內容。EMD伺服器4-3對應 -個人電腦1之要求，透過網路2與關連於內容之資料一齊地 對個人電腦1供給內容。 EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之個別供給之內容係以相同或不 同之壓縮方式被壓縮。EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之個別供給之 內容係以相同或不同之加密方式被加密。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 WWW ( World Wide Web )伺服器5-1對應個人電腦1 之要求，透過網路2，將讀取內容之CD(例如，CD之樂譜 名、或CD之販賣公司等）、以及對應由CD讀取之內容之資 料（例如，曲名、或作曲者名等）供給個人電腦1。WWW 伺服器5-2對應個人電腦1之要求，透過網路2，將讀取內 容之CD、以及對應由CD讀取之內容之資料供給個人電腦 1 ° 可攜式裝置6-1與關連於內容之資料（例如，曲名、再 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 501058 A7 五、發明說明（7 生次數、再生期限、或均衡器資訊等）一齊地記憶由個人 電腦1所供給之內容（即，被結帳之內容）。可攜式裝置 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 6]依據關連於內容之資料，再生記憶之內容，輸出於未圖 示出之耳機等。 例如，在超過作爲關連於內容之資料被記憶之再生次 數要再生時’可攜式裝置6 -1停止對應之內容之再生。在經 過作爲關連於內容之資料被記憶之再生期限後要再生時， 可攜式裝置6-1停止對應之內容之再生。可攜式裝置6-1以 作爲關連於內容之資料被記憶之均衡器資訊爲基礎，均衡 聲音給予輸出。 使用者將記憶內容之可攜式裝置6 -1由個人電腦1取出 ’攜帶行走、再生記憶之內容，可以以耳機等收聽對應內 容之音樂等。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 可攜式裝置6 - 2與關連於內容之資料一齊地記憶由個人 電腦1被供給之內容。可攜式裝置6 · 2依據關連於內容之資 料，再生記億之內容，輸出於未圖示出之耳機等。使用者 將記憶內容之可攜式裝置6 - 2由個人電腦1取出，攜帶行走 、再生記憶之內谷’可以以耳機等收聽對應內容之音樂等 可攜式裝置6-3與關連於內容之資料一齊地記憶由個人 電腦1被供給之內容。可攜式裝置6 · 3依據關連於內容之資 料，再生記億之內谷’輸出於未圖示出之耳機等。使用者 將記憶內容之可攜式裝置6-3由個人電腦1取出，攜帶行走 、再生記憶之內谷，可以以耳機等收聽對應內容之音樂等 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x297公釐） •10- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 ------- B7 五、發明說明（8 ) 〇 可攜式裝置6-4與關連於內容之資料一齊地記億由個人 電腦1被供給之內容（限定爲後述之再生期限或再生次數 等未被設定之內容）。可攜式裝置6-4依據關連於內容之資 料’再生記憶之內容，輸出於未圖示出之耳機等。使用者 將記憶內容之可攜式裝置6-4由個人電腦1取出，攜帶行走 、再生記憶之內容’可以以耳機等收聽對應內容之音樂等 〇 圖2係說明個人電腦1之構成圖。CPU(Central Processing Unit :中央處理單元）ι 1係實際實行各種應用程 式（詳細後述）或OS (Operating System :作業系統）。 ROM (Re ad-only Memory :唯讀記憶體 12 —邊儲存 CPU1 1 使 用之程式或運算用之參數之中的基本上固定之資料。 RAM(Random-Access Memory :隨機存取記憶體）13儲存於 CPU 1 1之實行中使用之程式，或其之實行中，適當變化之 參數。這些係藉由由CPU總線（bus )等構成之主總線14 而相互被接續。 主總線14透過電橋15被接續於PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect/Interface :周邊元件連接介面）總線 等之外部總線1 6。 鍵盤1 8在對CPU 1 1輸入各種指令時，由使用者所操作 。滑鼠1 9係進行顯示器20之畫面上之點之指示或選擇時， 由使用者所操作。顯示器20係由液晶顯示裝置或 CRT(Cathode Ray Tube :陰極射線管）等形成，以文字或圖 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------^--------1^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -11 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（9 ) 像顯示各種資訊。HDD(Hard Disk Drive :硬碟）2 1驅動硬碟 ，於其記錄或再生藉由CPU11實行之程式或資訊。 驅動器22係讀出被記錄於被裝置之磁碟4 1、光碟42 (包含CD )、光磁碟43、或半導體記憶體44之資料或程 式，將該資料或程式供給透過介面17、外部總線1 6、電橋 15、以及主總線14被接續之RAM13。1 fKg A7 _——__ B7 ^ __ V. Description of the invention (1) [Technical field to which the invention belongs] The present invention relates to an information processing device and method, and a program storage medium ', particularly an information processing device for combining or dividing content And methods, and program storage media. [Knowledge technology] Information processing devices such as personal computers access EMD (Electrical Music Distribution) servers through designated networks, and EMD servers can receive content such as music data. The user makes the content received on the personal computer checkout. ^ 31 The portable device checks out, and the portable device with the content checked out separately can be reproduced on the portable device. The personal computer can combine the contents of the two received, or divide the contents of the received one into two. [Problems to be Solved by the Invention] However, when the use conditions of the combined content are different, the combined content may have a wider range of available content due to the combined use conditions of the content, and there may be cases where the content may be used improperly. In addition, due to other use conditions of the combined content, the range of available content is narrowed, and there is a case where the user's rights are improperly damaged. Furthermore, for example, in the case of dividing content that has been checked out, due to the use conditions of the divided content, as in the case of combining, there is a case where the content is used improperly or the user's power is inappropriately damaged. The present invention has been completed in view of such a situation, and the purpose is: not to -------------- install-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Using, one side can combine or split the content. [Means for solving problems] The information processing device described in item 1 of the scope of patent application includes: a first determination means for determining whether the first content is settled; and a second determination means for determining whether the second content is settled Judging means; and in the case where it is judged that neither the first content nor the second content has been settled, combining the first content with the second content. The information processing method described in item 2 of the scope of the patent application includes: a first determination step of determining whether the first content 1 " is settled; and a 2 'determination step of determining whether the second content is settled; and When it is determined that neither the first content nor the second content has been checked out, the steps of combining the first content and the second content are combined. The program containing the program described in item 3 of the scope of patent application includes a first determination step to determine whether the first content is checked out; and a second determination step to determine whether the second content is checked out; and If it is determined that neither the first content nor the second content has been checked out, the steps of combining the first content and the second content are combined. The information processing device described in item 4 of the scope of patent application includes: means for determining whether the content has been settled; and means for dividing the content when the determined content has not been settled. The information processing method described in item 5 of the scope of the patent application includes: a determination step to determine whether the content has been checked out; and within the determination, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297) ) f— nnn ϋ ϋ nn · ϋ ft— ϋ I · flu I Bn nn I ϋ ^ δ, _ * nnnnnn I line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) System 501058 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the Invention (3) In the case where the content is not settled, the division step of the content. For example, the program of the program containing media described in item 6 of the patent application scope includes: a determination step for determining whether the content is checked out; and a division step for dividing the content when the determined content is not checked out. In the information processing device described in item 1 of the patent application scope, the information processing method described in item 2 of the patent application scope, and the program storage medium described in item 3 of the patent application scope, whether or not the first content is checked out is determined. It is determined whether 2 contents have been checked out. When it is determined that neither the first contents nor the second contents have been checked out, the first contents and the second contents are combined. In the information processing device described in item 4 of the scope of patent application, the processing method of the fee described in item 5 of the scope of patent application, and the program storage medium described in item 6 of the scope of patent application, whether or not the content is checked out is determined. When it is determined that the content has not been checked out, the content is divided. [Embodiment of the invention] Fig. 1 is a diagram showing an embodiment of a music data management system of the present invention. The personal computers 1 to 1 are connected to a network 2 composed of a local area network or the Internet. Personal computer 1-1 will be received by EMD (Electrical Music D1Stnbution: Electrical Music Distribution) servers 4-1 to 4-3, or music data (hereinafter, referred to as "Compact Disc") The content) is converted to a specified compression method (for example, ATRAC3 (trademark)), and the record is encrypted by an encryption method such as DES (Data Encryption Standard). The personal computer 1 -1 corresponds to the contents of the encrypted record, and the profit of the record display content is based on the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------- installation · -----Order --- II ---- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -6- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 ____J37______ V. Description of Invention (4 ) Conditions of use. The data of the use conditions show, for example, that the content of the data corresponding to the use conditions can be stored on three portable devices at the same time (? 〇1 ^ 1) 4〇6 ¥ 46 (also called? .1)) 6-1 It can be used up to 6-3, can be copied, and can be moved to other personal computers. Details of the conditions of use are described later. The personal computer 1 -1 records the encrypted content and the data related to the content (for example, the title of the song, the number of reproductions, the reproduction period, or the equalizer information, etc.) at the same time as the connected portable device 6-1 Correspond to make it memorize in the portable device 6-1, and update the data (hereinafter referred to as "checkout") corresponding to the usage conditions of the content worth 100 million. The personal computer 1 -1 stores the encrypted content and the data related to the content = Qi ΙΓ is memorized in the same portable device 6-2 as it is-when it is stored in the portable device 6-2, updated Information corresponding to the conditions of use of the stored content. The personal computer 1 -1 memorizes the encrypted recorded content and the data related to the content in the connected portable device 6-3 at the same time, and correspondingly stores it in the portable device 6-3, and updates the corresponding memory Information on the conditions of use of the content. Also, 'personal computer 1 -1' deletes the content of personal computer 1 -1 from the connected portable device 6-1 from the portable device 6_ 丨, and updates the information corresponding to the use conditions of the deleted content (hereinafter , Called check-in). Personal computer 1 -1 Remove the personal computer 1 -1 from the connected portable device 6-2 and delete the contents of the portable device 6-2 and update the information corresponding to the use conditions of the deleted content. 1 -1 Delete the contents of the personal computer 1 -1 on the connected portable device 6-3 from the portable device 6-3, and update the data corresponding to the use conditions of the deleted content. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) --------------------- Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (5) Personal computer 1-1 cannot be reported to personal computer 1-2 in portable 6-1 Checkout contents. PC 1 -1 cannot report the contents of PC 1-2 to checkout with portable device 6-2. Personal computer 1 -1 cannot report to personal computer 1-2 and checkout contents on portable device 6-3. The personal computers 1-2 are connected to a network 2 consisting of a local area network or the Internet. The personal computer 1-2 converts the content received by the EMD server 4-1 to 4-3, or the content read from the CD described later, into a specified compression method, and ′ gives an encrypted record using an encryption method such as DES. The personal computer 1-2 corresponds to the contents of the encrypted record, and records the use conditions of the use conditions of the displayed content. The information on the use conditions shows, for example, the contents of the corresponding portable use information on three portable devices at the same time-contents, which can be copied, and which can be moved to other personal computers. The personal computer 1-2 stores the encrypted recorded content together with the data related to the content in the connected portable device 6-4, and at the same time, stores it in the portable device 6-4, and updates the corresponding stored content. Information on conditions of use (and, checkout). In the case where there is an instruction to check out the content, the personal computer 1-2 does not check out the content on the portable device 6-4 when the content is set with the use period or the number of times of reproduction described later. In addition, the personal computer 1-2 deletes the contents of the personal computer 1-2 at the connected portable device 6-4 from the portable device 6-4, and updates the data corresponding to the use conditions of the deleted content. Personal computer 1-2 does not report the contents of personal computer 1-1 to checkout with portable device 6-4. The following 'does not need to distinguish between personal computers 1-丨 and personal computers. The paper size of this computer applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) IIIIIIIIII — — — IIIIIII illllllli (Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) -8-501058 Λ7 _________ B7 V. Description of the invention (6) When 1-2, it is simply called personal computer 1. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) EMD registration server 3 When the content of personal computer 1 starts from EMD server 4-1 to 4-3, it will respond to the requirements of personal computer 1 via network 2 'The personal computer 1 transmits the authentication keys necessary for mutual authentication between the personal computer 1 and the EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3, and transmits the personal computer 1 to the EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3. Program. The EMD server 4-1 responds to the request of the personal computer 1 and supplies the content to the personal computer 1 through the network 2 together with data related to the content (for example, song title, number of reproductions, reproduction period, or equalizer information, etc.). The EMD server 4-2 responds to the request of the personal computer 1 and supplies the content to the window 1 through the network 2 together with the data related to the content. The EMD server 4-3 responds to the request of the personal computer 1 and supplies the content to the personal computer 1 through the network 2 together with the data related to the content. The individual contents of the EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3 are compressed in the same or different compression methods. The contents of the individual supplies of the EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3 are encrypted by the same or different encryption methods. The WWW (World Wide Web) server 5-1 printed by the employee's consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs responds to the requirements of the personal computer 1. Through the network 2, a CD (for example, the score of the CD or the CD Selling company, etc.), and data (for example, song title, composer name, etc.) corresponding to the content read from the CD are supplied to the personal computer 1. The WWW server 5-2 responds to the requirements of the personal computer 1 and supplies the CD with the content read and the data corresponding to the content read by the CD to the personal computer 1 through the network 2. The portable device 6-1 is connected to Content information (for example, the title of the song, the size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 501058 A7) 5. Description of the invention (7 births, regeneration period, or equalizer information, etc.) Memorize the content provided by the personal computer 1 (ie, the content being checked out). Portable device (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 6] Regenerate the content of the memory based on the data related to the content, It is output to headphones (not shown), etc. For example, when the number of reproduction times that are stored as data related to the content is to be reproduced, the 'portable device 6 -1 stops reproduction of the corresponding content. When the data is to be reproduced after the memorized reproduction period, the portable device 6-1 stops the reproduction of the corresponding content. The portable device 6-1 is based on the equalizer information that is memorized as the data related to the content to balance The sound is output. The user takes out the portable device 6 -1 of the memory content from the personal computer 1 and carries the content of walking and regenerating the memory, and can listen to the music of the corresponding content with headphones and the like. Printed the portable device 6-2 to store the content supplied by the personal computer 1 together with the data related to the content. The portable device 6 · 2 reproduces the content recorded in billions based on the data related to the content and outputs it to Wei The earphones and the like shown in the figure. The user removes the portable device 6-2 that memorizes the content from the personal computer 1 and carries the inner valley of walking and regenerating memory. -3 The content supplied by the personal computer 1 is stored together with the data related to the content. The portable device 6 · 3 reproduces the contents of the "Kei Uchiya" based on the data related to the content and outputs it to headphones (not shown), etc. The user takes out the portable device 6-3 with memory content from the personal computer 1 and carries the inner valley of walking and regenerating memory, and can listen to the music of the corresponding content with headphones and the like Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 mm) • 10- Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 ------- B7 V. Invention Description (8) 〇Portable The device 6-4 records the content provided by the personal computer 1 together with the data related to the content (limited to content that has not been set such as the playback period or the number of playbacks described later). The portable device 6-4 is related to The contents of the content, 'reproduced memory content, output to headphones (not shown), etc. The user can take out the portable device 6-4 from the personal computer 1 and carry the content of walking and regenerating memory'. Listening to music and the like corresponding to the content. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the personal computer 1. The CPU (Central Processing Unit) 1 is a system that actually implements various application programs (described in detail later) or OS (Operating System). ROM (Re ad-only Memory: 12-side storage of basically fixed data in the program or computing parameters used by CPU1 1. RAM (Random-Access Memory) 13 storage Programs used in the implementation of the CPU 11 or parameters that are appropriately changed during the implementation. These are connected to each other by a main bus 14 composed of a CPU bus (bus) and the like. The main bus 14 passes through a bridge 15 It is connected to an external bus 16 such as a PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect / Interface) bus. The keyboard 18 is operated by the user when inputting various commands to the CPU 11 1. The mouse 19 is used for display The indication or selection of points on the screen of 20 is operated by the user. The display 20 is formed by a liquid crystal display device or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube: cathode ray tube). (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------- ^ -------- 1 ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -11-Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Affairs Cooperative of the Property Bureau 501058 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (9) The image displays various information. HDD (Hard Disk Drive) 2 1 drives a hard disk to record or reproduce programs or information executed by the CPU 11. The driver 22 reads out and is recorded in the Data or programs of the device's magnetic disk 41, optical disk 42 (including CD), optical magnetic disk 43, or semiconductor memory 44, which supplies the data or programs to the interface 17, the external bus 16, the bridge 15, and the host The bus 14 is connected to the RAM 13.

可攜式裝置6-1透過指定之纜線被接續於USB (Universal Serial Bus :萬用串列總線）埠 23-1。USB 埠 23-1 將透過介面17、外部總線16、電橋15、或主總線14由 HDD21、CPU11、或RAM13被供給之資料（例如，包含內 容或可攜式裝置6= 1乏11令等）輸出於可攜式裝置6-1。 -可攜式裝置6-2透過指定之纜線被接續於USB23-2。 USB埠23-2將透過介面17、外部總線16、電橋15、或主 總線14由HDD21、CPU11、或RAM13被供給之資料（例 如’包含內容或可攜式裝置6-2之指令等）輸出於可攜式裝 置 6-2。 可攜式裝置6-3透過指定之纜線被接續於USB23-3。 USB埠23-3將透過介面17、外部總線16、電橋15、或主 總線14由HDD21、CPU11、或RAM13被供給之資料（例 如’包含內容或可攜式裝置6-3之指令等）輸出於可攜式裝 置 6-3。 揚聲器24以由介面17被供給之資料或聲音信號爲基礎 ’輸出對應內容之指定之聲音。 這些鍵盤18至揚聲器24被接續於介面17，介面17透 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----------!11 裝·！ I — I !訂· II ! ---I ·線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -12- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _______ B7 五、發明說明（1〇 ) 過外部總線1 6、電橋1 5、以及主總線1 4被接續於CPU 1 1 〇 通信部25係網路2被接續，將由CPU1 1、或HDD21被 供給之資料（例如，登錄之要求、或內容之傳送要求等） 儲存於指定之方式之封包。透過網路· 2傳送之同時，透過 網路2將被儲存在接收之封包之資料（例如，認證鍵、或 內容等）輸出於CPU1 1、RAM13、或HDD21。 通信部25透過外部總線1 6、電橋1 5以及主總線1 4被 接續於CPU1 1。 個人電腦1 -2之構成與個人電腦1-1之構成相同之故， 其說明省略。 - -圖3係說明EMD伺服器4-3之構成。CPU61係實際實 行Web伺服器程式等之應用程式或〇S。ROM62 —般儲存 CPU61使用之程式或運算用之參數之中的基本上固定之資 料。RAM63係儲存於CPU61之實行中使用之程式，或於其 之實行中適當變化之參數。這些係藉由CPU總線等所構成 之主總線64被相互連接。 主總線64係透過電橋65被接續於PCI等之外部總線 66 ° 鍵盤68在對CPU61輸入各種指令時，由使用者所操作 。滑鼠69係進行顯示器70之畫面上之點之指示或選擇時， 由使用者所操作。顯示器70係由液晶顯示裝置或CRT等形 成，以文字或圖像顯示各種資訊。HDD71驅動硬碟，於其 記錄或再生藉由CPU61實行之程式或資訊。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） — — — — — — — — — — —— — I I i I I I I I ^^ 1111111„ *^^ (請先閱讀背面之注音3事項再填寫本頁) -13- 501058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（彳1 ) 驅動器72係讀出被記錄於被裝置之磁碟91、光碟92 、光磁碟93、或半導體記憶體94之資料或程式，將該資料 或程式供給透過介面67、外部總線66、電橋65、以及主 總線64被接續之RAM63。 這些鍵盤68至驅動器72被接續於介面67，介面67透 過外部總線66、電橋65、以及主總線64被接續於CPU6 1 〇 通信部73係網路2被接續，透過網路2，將接收之被 儲存於封包之資料（例如，後述之登錄所必要之資料、或 指定之程式之ID(Identifier)等）輸出於CPU61、RAM63、 或HDD71 ，同時厂#百—CPU61 、或HDD7 1被供糸合之資料（ - 例如，指定之數目之認證鍵、或程式等）儲存於指定之方 式之封包，透過網路2傳送。 通信部73透過外部總線66、電橋65以及主總線64被 接續於CPU61。 EMD伺服器4-1至4-3以及WWW伺服器5-1以及5-2之 個別之構成與EMD伺服器4-3之構成相同之故，其說明省 略。 接著，說明個人電腦1藉由實行指定之程式而實現之 機能。 圖4係說明藉由CPU 11之指定之程式的實行等而被實 現之個人電腦1之機能之構成之方塊圖。 內容管理程式111係以EMD選擇程式1 3 1、報到/結 帳管理程式132、加密方式轉換程式133、壓縮方式轉換程 本紙張又度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------ t ! ----I! {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -14· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 --B7 五、發明說明（12 ) 式134、加密程式135、利用條件轉換程式136、署名管理 程式137、認證程式138、解碼程式139、PD用驅動器140 、購入用驅動器1 4 1、購入用驅動器1 4 2等之複數之程式所 構成。 內容管理程式1 11例如係以被僞裝之指示、或被加密 之指示等被記述，該處理內容被由外部所隱蔽，其之處理 內容之解讀變困難（例如，使用者即使直接讀出內容管理 程式1 1 1，無法界定指示等）地構成。 EMD選擇程式131在內容管理程式ill被安裝於個人 電腦1時，不被包含於內容管理程式1 11，在後述之EMD 之登錄處理中，透~過1〇各2由EMD伺服器4-3而被接收。 -EMD選擇程式131選擇與EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之其中之一 接續，使購入用應用115或購入用驅動器141或142實行與 EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之其一通信（例如，購入內容時之內 容的下載等）。 報到/結帳管理程式1 32依據報到或結帳之設定、以 及被記錄於內容資料庫114之利用條件檔162-1至162-N， 將被儲存在內容檔161-1至16卜N之內容於可攜式裝置6-1 至6-3之其一結帳，或報到被記億於可攜式裝置6-1至6-3 之內容。 報到/結帳管理程式1 32對應報到或結帳之處理，更 新被儲存在被記錄於內容資料庫1 1 4之利用條件檔1 62-1至 162-N之利用條件之資料。 加密方式轉換程式1 33係透過網路2將購入用應用程式 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） n «ϋ ϋ n n n ϋ ϋ n «I n I I · I 1 n ϋ n ϋ n 一：<»JI n n Bn n n n n I (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) -15- 501058 A7 ___________ _B7_____ 五、發明說明（13 ) (請先閱讀背面之注音心事項再填寫本頁) 1 1 5由EMD伺服器4-1接收之內容的加密方式、購入用驅動 器141由EMD伺服器4-2接收之內容之加密方式、或購入用 辱區動器142由EMD伺服器4-3接收之內容之加密方式轉換爲 與被儲存在與資料庫1 14記億之內容檔161-1至161-N之內 容相同之加密方式。 又’加密方式轉換程式133在可攜式裝置6-1或6-3結 帳內容時，將結帳之內容轉換爲可攜式裝置6-1或6-3可以 利用之加密方式。 壓縮方式轉換程式134透過網路2，將購入用應用程式 1 15由EMD伺服器收之內容之壓縮方式、購入用驅動 器141由EMD伺服器4-2接收之內容之壓縮方式、或購入用 驅動器142由EMD伺服器4-3接收之內容之壓縮方式轉換爲 與被儲存在與資料庫1 1 4記憶之內容檔1 6 1 -1至1 6 1-Ν之內 容相同之壓縮方式。 壓縮方式轉換程式1 34將例如由CD讀取、由錄音程式 1 1 3所供給之內容（未被壓縮）以與字儲存在內容資料庫 1 14記錄之內容橋161-1至16卜N之內容相同之編碼化之方 式加以編碼。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 又，壓縮方式轉換程式134於可攜式裝置6-1或6-3結 帳內容時，將結帳之內容轉換爲可攜式裝置6-1或6-3可以 利用之縮壓方式。 加密程式1 35例如將由CD被讀取、由錄音程式1 1 3所 供給之內容（未被加密）以與被儲存在內容資料庫1 14記 錄之內容檔1 6 1 · 1至1 6 1-N之內容相同之加密方式進行加密 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 Α7 __ Β7 五、發明說明（14 ) 〇 利用條件轉換程式1 3 6係透過網路2，將顯示購入用應 用程式1 1 5由EMD伺服器4-1接收之內容之利用條件之資料 (所謂之使用規則）、顯示購入用驅動器1 4 1由EMD伺服 器4 - 2接收之內容之利用條件之資料、或顯示購入用驅動器 142由EMD伺服器4-3接收之內容之利用條件之資料轉換爲 與被儲存在內容資料庫114記錄之利用條件檔162-1至162-N之利用條件資料相同之格式。 又，利用條件轉換程式136在可攜式裝置6-1或6-3結 帳內容時，將對應於結帳之內容之利用條件之資料轉換爲 可攜式裝置6-1或Τϋ以利用之利用條件之資料。 - 署名管理程式1 37係在實行報到或結帳之處理之前， 以被包含於被儲存在被記錄於內容資料庫114之利用條件 檔162-1至162-Ν之利用條件之資料之署名（後述）爲基礎 ，檢測利用條件之資料之篡改。署名管理程式1 37伴隨報 到或結帳之處理，更新對應被儲存在被記錄於內容資料庫 114之利用條件檔162-1至162-Ν之利用條件之資料，更新 被包含於利用條件之資料之署名。 認證程式1 38實行內容管理程式1 1 1與購入用應用程式 1 15之相互認證之處理，以及內容管理程式1 1 1與購入用驅 動器141之相互認證之處理。又，認證程式138記憶在EMD 伺服器4-1與購入用應用程式115之相互認證之處理、EMD 伺服器4-2與購入用驅動器141之相互認證之處理、以及 EMD伺服器4-3與購入用驅動器142之相互認證之處理被利 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） 讎17· 1------------·1111111 訂-! I! (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 __ B7 五、發明說明（15 ) 用之認證鍵。 認證程式138在相互認證之處理所利用之認證鍵在內 容管理程式1 1 1被安裝於個人電腦1時，並未被記憶於認證 程式138，藉由顯示操作指示程式112在登錄之處理正常被 實行時，由EMD登錄伺服器3被供給，被記憶於認證程式 138 〇 解碼程式139於個人電腦1再生被儲存在內容資料庫 1 1 4記錄之內容檔1 6 1 -1至1 6 1-N之內容時，解碼內容。 PD用驅動器140在可攜式裝置6-2結帳指定之內容時 ’或由可攜式裝置6-2報到指定之內容時，對可攜式裝置 6_2供給內容或對可*_灵裝置6-2供給實行指定之處理之指 -令。 PD用驅動器140在可攜式裝置6-1結帳指定之內容時 ’或由可攜式裝置6-1報到指定之內容時，對裝置驅動器 Π 6-1供給內容或對裝置驅動器ιι6-ι供給實行指定之處理 之指令。 PD用驅動器140在可攜式裝置6-3結帳指定之內容時 ’或由可攜式裝置6-3報到指定之內容時，對裝置驅動器 Π6-2供給內容或對裝置驅動器116-2供給實行指定之處理 之指令。 購入用驅動窃：1 4 1係所謂之插入（p 1 u g -丨n )程式，與 內容管理程式111 一齊被安裝’由EMD伺服器4-3透過網路 2被供給’或被記錄在指定之cd而被供給。購入用驅動器 1 4 1在被安裝於個人電腦1時，透過內容管理程式u1所有 本紙張尺錢《巾_目家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------- I I--— II ^ · I I I--I I 1^^ (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) -18 - 501058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（16 ) 之指定之形式之介面，傳送接收內容管理程式1 1 1與資料 〇 購入用驅動器141透過網路2對EMD伺服器4-2要求指 定之內容之傳送之同時，由EMD伺服器4-2接收內容。又 ，購入用驅動器14 1在由EMD伺服器4-2接收內容時，實行 收費之處理。 購入用驅動器1 42係與內容管理程式m —齊被安裝之 程式，透過網路2對EMD伺服器4-3要求指定之內容之傳送 之同時，由EMD伺服器4_3接收內容。又，購入用驅動器 142在由EMD伺服器4-3接收內容時，實行收費之處理。 顯示操作指示程~式1 1 2係以過濾資料檔1 8 1、顯示資料 -檔182、圖像檔183-1至183-K、或履歷資料檔184爲基礎 ，在顯示器20顯示指定之視窗之圖像，以鍵盤1 8或滑鼠1 9 之操作爲基礎，對內容管理程式1 1 1指示報到或結帳等之 處理之實行。 過濾資料檔1 8 1儲存對個別被儲存在被記錄於內容資 料庫114之內容檔161-1至161-N之內容賦予分量用之資料 >被記錄於HDD21 。 顯示資料檔1 82儲存被儲存在被記錄於內容資料庫1 1 4 之內容檔161-1至161-N之內容之資料，被記錄於HDD21。 圖像檔183-1至183-K儲存對應被記錄於內容檔161-1 至1 6 1-N之圖像、或對應後述之套件之圖像，被記錄於 HDD21。 以下，在無須個別區別圖像檔183-1至183-K時，簡單 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------裝·-------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -19- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 -----B7 五、發明說明（17 ) 稱爲圖像檔1 8 3。 履歷資料檔184儲存被儲存在被記錄於內容資料庫114 之內容檔1 6 1 -1至1 6 1-N之內容被結帳之次數、被報到之次 數、其之日期等之履歷資料，被記錄於HDD21。 顯示操作指示程式1 1 2在登錄之處理時，透過網路2， 對EMD登錄伺服器3傳送預先記憶之內容管理程式111之 ID之同時，由Emd登錄伺服器3接收認證用鍵以及EMD選 擇程式131，對EMD選擇程式131供給認證用鍵以及EMD 選擇程式1 3 1。 錄音程式1 1 3係使顯示指定之視窗之圖像，以鍵盤1 8 或滑鼠1 9之操作m，由被裝置於驅動器22之光碟42 • 之CD讀出內容之錄音時間等之資料。 錄音程式1 1 3以被記錄在CD之內容之錄音時間等爲基 礎’透過網路2對WWW伺服器5-1或5_2要求對應CD之資 料（例如，樂譜名、或藝術家名等）或對應被記錄在CD之 內容之資料（例如，曲名等）之傳送之同時，由WWW伺月艮 器5-1或5-2接收對應CD之資料或對應被記錄於CD之內容 之資料。 錄音程式1 1 3將對應接收之CD之資料或對應被記錄於 CD之內容之資料供給顯示操作指示程式丨丨2。 又，錄音之指示被輸入時，錄音程式11 3由被裝置於 驅動器22之光碟42之CD讀出內容，與對應可以結帳之最 大可能次數等之內容之利用條件之資料等一齊地輸出於內 容管理程式111。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -----------· I — I I--I 訂·！ II---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -20 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 Λ7 ___ B7 五、發明說明（18 ) 內容資料庫1 1 4將由內容管理程式1 1 1被供給之以指定 之方式被壓縮、以指定之方式被加密之內容儲存在內容檔 161-1至161-N之其一（記錄於HDD21 )。內容資料庫114 將對應分別被儲存在內容檔1 6 1 -1至1 6 1-N之內容之利用條 件之資料儲存於分別對應內容被儲存之內容檔1 6 1-1至1 6 1 · N之利用條件檔162-1至162-N之其一（記錄於HDD21 )。 內容資料庫114也可以將內容檔161-1至16卜N或利用 條件檔162-1至162-N當成記錄而記錄之。 例如，對應被儲存在內容檔161-1之內容之利用條件之 資料被儲存在利用條件檔162-1。對應被儲存在內容檔The portable device 6-1 is connected to a USB (Universal Serial Bus) port 23-1 through a designated cable. USB port 23-1 will be supplied by HDD21, CPU11, or RAM13 via interface 17, external bus 16, bridge 15, or main bus 14 (for example, contains content or portable device 6 = 1 lack 11 orders, etc. ) Output on portable device 6-1. -The portable device 6-2 is connected to the USB23-2 through the designated cable. USB port 23-2 will be supplied by HDD21, CPU11, or RAM13 via interface 17, external bus 16, bridge 15, or main bus 14 (such as' contains content or instructions for portable device 6-2, etc.) Output to the portable device 6-2. The portable device 6-3 is connected to the USB23-3 through a designated cable. USB port 23-3 will be supplied by HDD21, CPU11, or RAM13 via interface 17, external bus 16, bridge 15, or main bus 14 (such as' contains content or instructions for portable device 6-3, etc.) Output to portable device 6-3. The speaker 24 outputs a specified sound corresponding to the content based on the data or sound signal supplied from the interface 17. These keyboards 18 to speakers 24 are connected to the interface 17, and the interface 17 is transparent. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). I — I! Order · II! --- I · Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -12- Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _______ B7 V. Description of the invention (1 〇) The external bus 16, bridge 15 and main bus 14 are connected to the CPU 1 1 〇 The communication unit 25 series network 2 is connected, and the data to be supplied by the CPU 1 1 or HDD 21 (for example, registered Request, or content delivery request, etc.) A packet stored in a specified method. At the same time of transmitting through the network · 2, the data stored in the received packet (for example, the authentication key or the content) is output to the CPU1 1, RAM13, or HDD21 through the network 2. The communication unit 25 is connected to the CPU 11 through the external bus 16, the bridge 15, and the main bus 14. Since the configuration of the personal computer 1-2 is the same as the configuration of the personal computer 1-1, the description is omitted. --Figure 3 illustrates the structure of the EMD server 4-3. The CPU61 is an application program or a system that actually implements a web server program or the like. ROM62 generally stores basically fixed data among programs used by the CPU61 or calculation parameters. The RAM 63 is a program stored in the execution of the CPU 61 or a parameter which is appropriately changed in the execution thereof. These are connected to each other by a main bus 64 constituted by a CPU bus or the like. The main bus 64 is connected to an external bus such as PCI via a bridge 65. The keyboard 68 is operated by the user when various commands are input to the CPU 61. When the mouse 69 instructs or selects a point on the screen of the display 70, it is operated by the user. The display 70 is formed of a liquid crystal display device, a CRT, or the like, and displays various information in text or images. HDD71 drives a hard disk to record or reproduce programs or information executed by CPU61. This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — # # #### Please fill in this page for further information) -13- 501058 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (彳 1) Drive 72 reads out the magnetic disc 91, optical disc 92, magneto-optic recorded on the device The data or program of the disc 93 or the semiconductor memory 94 is supplied to the RAM 63 connected through the interface 67, the external bus 66, the bridge 65, and the main bus 64. These keyboards 68 to 72 are connected to the interface 67, the interface 67 is connected to the CPU 6 through the external bus 66, the bridge 65, and the main bus 64. The communication unit 73 is connected to the network 2. The received data is stored in the packet through the network 2 (for example, The data necessary for registration later, or the ID (Identifier) of the specified program, etc., are output to the CPU61, RAM63, or HDD71, and the factory # 100—CPU61, or HDD7 1 is supplied with the combined data (for example, the specified Number of authentication keys, Programs, etc.) The packets stored in the specified method are transmitted through the network 2. The communication section 73 is connected to the CPU 61 through the external bus 66, the bridge 65, and the main bus 64. The EMD server 4-1 to 4-3 and the WWW server Since the individual configurations of the devices 5-1 and 5-2 are the same as those of the EMD server 4-3, descriptions thereof are omitted. Next, the functions of the personal computer 1 by implementing a designated program will be described. Fig. 4 is an explanation Function block diagram of the function of the personal computer 1 implemented by execution of a designated program of the CPU 11. The content management program 111 is an EMD selection program 1 3 1, a check-in / check-out management program 132, and an encryption method conversion. Program 133, compression method conversion process This paper is again applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ t! ---- I! {Please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page) -14 · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 --B7 V. Invention Description (12) Formula 134, encryption program 135, use condition conversion program 136, signature management Program 137, authentication program 138, decoder program 139, PD driver 1 40. Buying driver 1 4 1 and buying driver 1 4 2 are plural programs. The content management program 1 11 is described, for example, by a disguised instruction or an encrypted instruction. The processing content is described by Concealed from the outside, it is difficult to interpret the processing content (for example, even if the user directly reads the content management program 1 1 1, the instructions cannot be defined). The EMD selection program 131 is not included in the content management program 11 when the content management program ill is installed on the personal computer 1. In the EMD registration process described below, each of the EMD selection programs 131 is transmitted through the EMD server 4-3. While being received. -The EMD selection program 131 selects to be connected to one of the EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3, and enables the purchase application 115 or the purchase driver 141 or 142 to be implemented with the EMD server 4-1 to 4-3. Communication (for example, downloading of content when purchasing content, etc.). The check-in / check-out management program 1 32 will be stored in the content files 161-1 to 16 according to the settings of check-in or check-out and the use condition files 162-1 to 162-N recorded in the content database 114. The content is settled on one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3, or the content registered on the portable device 6-1 to 6-3. The check-in / check-out management program 1 32 corresponds to the processing of check-in or check-out, and updates the data of the use conditions 1 62-1 to 162-N which are stored in the content condition file 1 1 4 which is recorded in the content database. Encryption method conversion program 1 33 is an application for purchase through the Internet 2. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) n «ϋ ϋ nnn ϋ ϋ n« I n II · I 1 n ϋ n ϋ n One: < »JI nn Bn nnnn I (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -15- 501058 A7 ___________ _B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (13) (Please read the back Please fill in this page for the phonetic matters) 1 1 5 Encryption method of content received by EMD server 4-1, purchase driver 141 Encryption method of content received by EMD server 4-2, or purchase driver 142 The encryption method of the content received by the EMD server 4-3 is converted to the same encryption method as the content stored in the content files 161-1 to 161-N of the database of 1.4 billion. The encryption method conversion program 133 converts the contents of the checkout into an encryption method that can be used by the portable device 6-1 or 6-3 when the portable device 6-1 or 6-3 checks out the contents. The compression method conversion program 134 uses the network 2 to download the application program 1 15 the compression method of the content received by the EMD server, the purchase driver 141 the compression method of the content received by the EMD server 4-2, or the purchase driver. 142 The compression method of the content received by the EMD server 4-3 is converted to the same compression method as the content stored in the content file 1 1 4 stored in the database 1 1 4 to 6 1-N. The compression method conversion program 1 34 stores, for example, the content (uncompressed) read from the CD and supplied by the recording program 1 1 3 with the words in the content database 1 14 recorded content bridges 161-1 to 16b. The content is encoded in the same way. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the compression method conversion program 134 converts the checkout content to the portable device 6-1 or 6 when the portable device 6-1 or 6-3 checks out the content -3 available compression method. The encryption program 1 35 will, for example, read the content from the CD and provide the content (unencrypted) from the recording program 1 1 3 to the content file recorded in the content database 1 14 and stored 1 6 1 · 1 to 1 6 1- The content of N is encrypted by the same encryption method. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). It is printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The use condition conversion program 1 3 6 is used to display the purchase application program 1 1 5 through the network 2 (the so-called usage rules), and the purchase driver 1 4 1 The data of the conditions of use of the content received by the EMD server 4-2 or the data showing the conditions of use of the content received by the drive for purchase 142 by the EMD server 4-3 are converted to those recorded in the content database 114 The utilization condition data of the utilization condition files 162-1 to 162-N have the same format. In addition, the use condition conversion program 136 converts data corresponding to the use conditions of the content checked out to the portable device 6-1 or T 或 when using the portable device 6-1 or 6-3 to check out the content. Information on conditions of use. -The signature management program 1 37 is the signature of the information contained in the use condition files 162-1 to 162-N stored in the use condition file 162-1 to 162-N recorded in the content database 114 before the processing of check-in or checkout ( Based on the following), the tampering of the information on the conditions of use is detected. The signature management program 1 37 updates the data corresponding to the use conditions stored in the use condition files 162-1 to 162-N recorded in the content database 114 along with the processing of check-in or checkout, and updates the data included in the use conditions The signature. The authentication program 1 38 performs a process of mutual authentication between the content management program 1 1 1 and the purchase application 1 15, and a process of mutual authentication between the content management program 11 and the purchase driver 141. The authentication program 138 is stored in the mutual authentication process between the EMD server 4-1 and the purchase application 115, the mutual authentication process between the EMD server 4-2 and the purchase driver 141, and the EMD server 4-3 and The purchase of the driver 142 for mutual authentication is processed according to the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). 雠 17 · 1 ------------ · 1111111 Order- ! I! (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 __ B7 V. Description of the invention (15) Authentication key. The authentication key used by the authentication program 138 in the process of mutual authentication is not stored in the authentication program 138 when the content management program 1 1 1 is installed on the personal computer 1. The operation of the registration is normally displayed by displaying the operation instruction program 112. At the time of implementation, it is supplied by the EMD registration server 3, and is stored in the authentication program 138. The decoding program 139 is reproduced on the personal computer 1. The content file stored in the content database 1 1 4 is recorded. 1 6 1 -1 to 1 6 1- When the content is N, the content is decoded. The PD driver 140 supplies content to the portable device 6_2 when the designated content is checked out by the portable device 6-2 or when the designated content is reported by the portable device 6-2. -2 Supply the order of execution of the specified treatment. The PD driver 140 supplies content to the device driver Π 6-1 when the specified content is checked out by the portable device 6-1, or when the specified content is reported by the portable device 6-1. Provides instructions for performing the specified processing. The PD driver 140 supplies the content to the device driver Π6-2 or the device driver 116-2 when the specified content is checked out by the portable device 6-3 or when the specified content is reported by the portable device 6-3. Instruction to execute specified processing. Drivers for purchase: 1 4 1 is a so-called plug-in (p 1 ug-丨 n) program, which is installed together with the content management program 111 'provided by the EMD server 4-3 through the network 2' or recorded in the designated Cd is supplied. When purchasing driver 1 4 1 is installed on personal computer 1, all paper sheets of the content management program u1 "towel_mejia standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)" ------- ------- I I --- II ^ · II I--II 1 ^^ (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -18-501058 Employee Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed A7 B7 V. Designated interface of invention description (16), transmission and reception of content management program 1 1 1 and data 0 Driver for purchase 141 Request transmission of specified content to EMD server 4-2 via network 2 At the same time, the content is received by the EMD server 4-2. In addition, the purchase driver 141 executes a charge process when the content is received by the EMD server 4-2. The driver for purchase 1 42 is a program installed together with the content management program m. The EMD server 4-3 requests the content to be transmitted through the network 2 and the content is received by the EMD server 4_3. In addition, the purchase driver 142 performs charge processing when receiving the content from the EMD server 4-3. Display operation instruction procedure ~ Formula 1 1 2 is based on filtering data file 1 8 1, display data-file 182, image file 183-1 to 183-K, or history data file 184, and the designated window is displayed on the display 20 The image is based on the operation of the keyboard 18 or mouse 19, and the processing of instructions such as check-in or checkout of the content management program 11 is performed. The filter data file 1 8 1 stores data for assigning weights to the contents individually stored in the content files 161-1 to 161-N recorded in the content database 114 > recorded in HDD21. The display data file 1 82 stores the data stored in the content files 161-1 to 161-N recorded in the content database 1 1 4 and is recorded in the HDD21. The image files 183-1 to 183-K store images corresponding to those recorded in the content files 161-1 to 16 1-N, or images corresponding to the packages described later, and are recorded in the HDD21. In the following, when there is no need to distinguish the image files 183-1 to 183-K individually, the paper size of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). ---- Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -19- Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 ----- B7 5 The invention description (17) is called image file 183. The resume data file 184 stores resume data such as the number of times the content was checked out, the number of reports, and the date stored in the content files 1 6 1 -1 to 16 1-N recorded in the content database 114. Recorded on HDD21. When displaying the operation instruction program 1 1 2 during the registration process, the ID 2 of the content management program 111 is transmitted to the EMD registration server 3 through the network 2 and the Emd registration server 3 receives the authentication key and the EMD selection. Program 131, which provides an authentication key and an EMD selection program 1 3 1 to the EMD selection program 131. The recording program 1 1 3 is to display the image of the designated window, use the keyboard 18 or the mouse 19 to operate m, and read the recording time of the content from the CD 42 • installed on the drive 22. Recording program 1 1 3 Based on the recording time, etc. of the content recorded on the CD, 'WWW server 5-1 or 5_2 is requested via the network 2 for the corresponding CD data (for example, music score, or artist name, etc.) or corresponding At the same time as the data (for example, song title, etc.) recorded on the content of the CD is transmitted, the WWW server 5-1 or 5-2 receives the data corresponding to the CD or the data corresponding to the content recorded on the CD. The recording program 1 1 3 provides data corresponding to the received CD or data corresponding to the content recorded on the CD to the display operation instruction program 丨 2. When the recording instruction is input, the recording program 113 is read out from the CD mounted on the optical disc 42 of the drive 22, and is outputted together with data corresponding to the use conditions of the content that can be billed to the maximum possible number, etc. Content management program 111. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- · I — I I--I Order ·! II ---- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -20-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 Λ7 ___ B7 V. Description of the invention (18) Content database 1 1 4 The management program 1 1 1 is supplied with the content compressed in the specified manner and encrypted in the specified manner and stored in one of the content files 161-1 to 161-1N (recorded in HDD21). The content database 114 stores data corresponding to the use conditions of the content stored in the content files 1 6 1 -1 to 1 6 1-N, respectively, in the content files corresponding to the content being stored 1 6 1-1 to 1 6 1 · One of the utilization condition files of N 162-1 to 162-N (recorded in HDD21). The content database 114 may also record the content files 161-1 to 16N or the use condition files 162-1 to 162-N as records. For example, data corresponding to the use conditions of the content stored in the content file 161-1 is stored in the use condition file 162-1. Correspondence is stored in the content file

1 6 1-N之內容之利栩篠~#'之資料被儲存在利用條件檔1 62-N ~ 〇 啓動程式1 17係在個人電腦1-1之作業系統動作時，經 常動作之所謂常駐程式，在由裝置驅動器1 1 6-1接收可攜式 裝置6-1被接續於USB連接埠23-1之旨意之信號之情形， 顯示操作指示程式1 1 2在未被啓動時，使顯示操作指示程 式1 1 2啓動。 啓動程式117在由裝置驅動器116-2接收可攜式裝置 6-3被接續於USB連接埠23-3之旨意之信號之情形，顯示操 作指示程式11 2在未被啓動時，使顯示操作指示程式1丨2啓 動。 顯示操作指示程式112在可攜式裝置6_1被接續於USB 連接埠23-1 ’或可攜式裝置6-3被接續於USB連接埠23-3 ，藉由啓動程式1 1 7被啓動時，由被接續之可攜式裝置6-1 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) •21 - 5010581 6 1-N's contents are stored in the use condition file 1 62-N ~ 〇 Start program 1 17 is the so-called resident that often operates when the operating system of the personal computer 1-1 is operating Program, when the device driver 1 1 6-1 receives the signal that the portable device 6-1 is connected to the USB port 23-1, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed when it is not activated The operation instruction program 1 1 2 is started. When the startup program 117 receives a signal that the portable device 6-3 is connected to the USB port 23-3 by the device driver 116-2, the display operation instruction program 11 2 displays the operation instruction when it is not activated Program 1 丨 2 starts. When the operation instruction program 112 is displayed when the portable device 6_1 is connected to the USB port 23-1 ′ or the portable device 6-3 is connected to the USB port 23-3, when the program 1 1 7 is started, From the connected portable device 6-1 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------ install ------- -Order --------- Line (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) • 21-501058

五、發明說明（19 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 至6-3 g貝出封應被gg錄在可攜式裝置6“至6-3之內容之資 料（例如’曲名、演奏時間等）’顯示於後述之指定之視 窗。 進而’於顯示操作指示程式丨i 2並未被做指定之設定 之情形’顯示操作指示程式11 2在可攜式裝置6-丨被接續於 USB連接埠23-1，或可攜式裝置6-3被接續於USB連接埠 23-3 ’藉由啓動程式in被啓動時，由被接續之可攜式裝置 6-1至6-3報到內容（限定於由個人電腦id被結帳之內容 )，依據設定，選擇內容，於可攜式裝置6-1至6-3結帳被 選擇之內容。 以下，在沒有必要倫別區別內容檔1 6 1 -1至1 6 1-N時， 單稱爲內容檔1 6 1。以下，在沒有必要個別區別利用條件 檔162-1至162-N時，單稱爲利用條件檔162。 個人電腦1 -2之機能之構成與個人電腦1 -1之機能之構 成相同之故，其說明省略。 圖5係顯示被儲存在利用條件檔162-1至162-N之利用 條件之資料之例圖。內容ID係界定被儲存在個別之內容檔 1 6 1 -1或1 6 1-N之內容之資料。在可以結帳上，被設定“ YES”或“ NO”之其一之値，在“ YES”被設定時，內容管理 程式1 1 1可以將以內容ID被界定之內容於可攜式裝置6-1 至6-3之其一結帳。在可以結帳上，被設定“ NO”時，內容 管理程式1 1 1也不將以內容ID被界定之內容於可攜式裝置 6-1至6-3之其一結帳。 內容管理程式111可以結帳對應之內容檔1 6 1 -1或 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） ----I ---lull I---I — I 1^. (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) 22 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 5〇1〇58 A7 _B7 五、發明說明（20 ) 1 6 1-N之其一之最大之次數被設定於可以結帳最大次數。可 以結帳最大次數不會被變更。 在現在時間點內容管理程式111可以結帳對應之內容 檔161-1或16 1-N之其一之次數被設定於可以結帳次數。內 容管理程式111在實行1次之結帳時，可以結帳次數被減 算。內容管理程式1 11實行1次報到時，可以結帳次數被 增算。 內容檔1 6 1或1 6 1-N之其一都1次也未被結帳之情形 ，在對應之可以結帳次數被設定爲與可以結帳最大次數爲 相同之値。 實行結帳，可-以HI次數由“ 1 “變爲“ 〇 “時，在可 、 以結帳上被設定“ NO”。實行報到，可以結帳次數由“ 〇 “ 變成“1 “時，在可以結帳上被設定“ YES”。 在可以移動上，被設定“ YES”或“ NO”之其一之値， 在“ YES”被設定時，內容管理程式111可以移動以內容ID 被界定之內容。在可以移動上，被設定“ NO”時，內容管 理程式1 1 1不可移動以內容ID被界定之內容。 在可以複製上，被設定“ YES”或“ NO”之其一之値， 在“ YES”被設定時，內容管理程式111可以複製以內容ID 被界定之內容。在可以複製上，被設定“ NO”時，內容管 理程式11 1不可複製以內容ID被界定之內容。 可以複製次數係被設定爲內容管理程式111可以實行 之複製之次數。V. Description of the invention (19 Information printed by the Consumers 'Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs to 6-3 g shells should be recorded by gg on the portable device 6 "to 6-3 (such as' track title, performance time Etc. 'is displayed in the designated window described later. Further,' in the case where the operation instruction program 丨 i 2 is not specified 'is displayed. The display operation instruction program 11 2 is connected to the USB connection in the portable device 6- 丨Port 23-1, or portable device 6-3 is connected to USB port 23-3 'When activated by the launcher in, the connected portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 report to the content ( (Limited to the content checked out by the personal computer id), according to the setting, select the content, and check the selected content on the portable device 6-1 to 6-3. Below, it is not necessary to distinguish the content file 1 6 When 1 -1 to 1 6 1-N, it is simply called content file 1 6 1. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish the use condition files 162-1 to 162-N individually, it is simply called use condition file 162. Personal Computer 1 The structure of the function of -2 is the same as the structure of the function of the personal computer 1 -1, and its description is omitted. An example of the data of the use conditions in the use condition files 162-1 to 162-N. The content ID defines the data of the contents stored in the individual content files 16 1 -1 or 16 1-N. On the account, one of "YES" or "NO" is set. When "YES" is set, the content management program 1 1 1 can set the content defined by the content ID on the portable device 6-1 to One of 6-3 checkout. When “NO” is set on the checkout, the content management program 1 1 1 will not send the content defined by the content ID to the portable device 6-1 to 6-3. The content management program 111 can check out the corresponding content file 1 6 1 -1 or this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ---- I --- lull I --- I — I 1 ^. (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) 22 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5〇〇58 A7 _B7 V. Description of the Invention (20) 1 6 1-N The maximum number of times is set to the maximum number of times that can be checked out. The maximum number of times that can be checked out will not be changed. At this point in time, the content management program 111 can The number of times of the content file 161-1 or 16 1-N corresponding to the checkout is set to the number of times that can be checked out. When the content management program 111 executes a single checkout, the number of times that can be checked out is reduced. The content management program The number of checkout times can be increased when one check-in is carried out on 1 11. If the content file 1 6 1 or 1 6 1-N is not checked out once, the number of checkout times is set accordingly. It is the same as the maximum number of times you can check out. When the checkout is executed, the number of HI times can be changed from "1" to "0", and "NO" is set to "Yes" and "Yes". When check-in is implemented, the number of possible checkouts is changed from "0" to "1", and "YES" is set in the checkout possible. One of “YES” or “NO” is set to be movable. When “YES” is set, the content management program 111 can move the content defined by the content ID. When “NO” is set on the mobile, the content management program 1 1 1 cannot move the content defined by the content ID. When it is possible to copy, one of "YES" or "NO" is set. When "YES" is set, the content management program 111 can copy the content defined by the content ID. When "NO" is set for copying, the content management program 11 1 cannot copy the content defined by the content ID. The number of times of copying is set to the number of times that the content management program 111 can perform copying.

使用期限係記述可以利用（結帳或再生等）以內容ID 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------- I---I 丨—訂--------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -23- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（21 ) 被界定之內容之期間。 可以使用之地域係記述可以利用（結帳或再生等）以 內容ID被界定之內容之地域（例如，日本或全世界等）。 在署名係儲存以被設定在內容ID至可以使用地域之資 料爲基礎，署名管理程式Π7所產生之資料（以下，稱爲 署名資料）。署名資料被利用於利用條件之資料的篡改之 檢測。產生署名管理程式1 37之署名資料之算術係一方向 性函數，而且，未被公開之故，供給內容管理程式1 1 1者 以外，以內容ID至被設定在可以使用地域之資料爲基礎， 要產生正確署名資料有其困難。 購入應用程式1丁5~函EMD登錄伺服器3透過網路2被供 - 給，或被記錄於指定之CD而被供給。購入應用程式1 1 5透 過網路2，對EMD伺服器4_1要求指定之內容之傳送之同時 ，由EMD伺服器4-1接收內容，供給於內容管理程式111。 又，購入應用程式1 15由EMD伺服器4-1接收內容時，實行 收費之處理。 接著，說明被儲存在顯示資料檔82之資料與被儲存在 內容資料庫之內容檔161-1至16 1-N之對應賦予。 被儲存在內容檔161-1至161-N之其一之內容係屬於指 定之套件。套件更詳細而言爲：原始套件、我的套件、或 過濾套件之其一。 原始套件係1以上之內容屬之，對應EMD伺服器4-1至 4-3之內容之分類（例如，所謂之對應於樂譜）、或一張之 CD。內容係屬於其一之原始套件，無法屬於複數之原始套 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ---------II--裝 — II 訂----— I! 線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -24- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（22 ) 件。又，內容所屬之原始套件無法變更。使用者可以編輯 (資訊之追加、或追加之資訊之變更）對應原始套件之資 訊之一部份。 圖6係說明被包含於顯示資料檔82之規定原始套件 內容之關係之原始套件用顯示資料20 1與內容檔1 6 1 -1至 1 6 1-N之關係之例圖。原始套件用顯示資料20 1係包含套件 用顯示資料211-1至221-M。 套件用顯示資料2 1 1 -1係與內容顯示用資料22 1-1 -1至 221-1-1相互被賦予關連。 內容顯示用資料22 1 -1-1係對應被儲存於內容檔1 6 1 -1 之內容。被儲存於內|搶1 6 1 -1之內容之利用條件之資料係 - 被儲存在利用條件檔162-1。 內容顯示用資料221-1-2係對應被儲存於內容檔161-2 之內容。被儲存於內容檔1 6 1 -2之內容之利用條件之資料係 被儲存在利用條件檔162-2。 內容顯示用資料221-1-i係對應被儲存於內容檔161-q 之內容。被儲存於內容檔1 6 1 -q之內容之利用條件之資料係 被儲存在利用條件檔162-q。 套件用顯示資料211-2係與內容顯示用資料221-2-1至 221-2-」相互被賦予關連。 內容顯示用寶料221-2-1係對應被儲存於內容檔161-( q+1 )之內容。被儲存於內容檔161-(q+l)之內容之利用條 件之資料係被儲存在利用條件檔162-U+1)。 內容顯示用資料22 1-2-2係對應被儲存於內容檔161-( 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I n n n n n n n 1· I —mmm n I m n n n I n n n 訂----I-----線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -25- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（23 ) Q + 2 )之內容。被儲存於內容檔161-U + 2)之內容之利用條 件之資料係被儲存在利用條件檔162-U + 2)。 內容顯示用資料221-2-j係對應被儲存於內容檔161-r 之內容。被儲存於內容檔1 6 1 -r之內容之利用條件之資料係 被儲存在利用條件檔1 6 2 · r。 同樣地，套件用顯示資料2 11-M係與內容顯示用資料 221-M-1至221-M-p相互被賦予關連。 內容顯示用資料221-M-p係對應被儲存於內容檔161-N 之內容。被儲存於內容檔1 6 1-N之內容之利用條件之資料係 被儲存在利用條件檔162-N。 以下，在沒#必I®別區分套件用顯示資料211-1至 -2 1 1-M時，單稱爲套件用顯示資料2 1 1-1。以下，在沒有必 要個別區分內容顯示用資料221-1-1至22卜M-p時，單稱爲 內容顯示用資料221。 以下，在沒有必要個別區分內容檔1 6 1 -1至1 6 1-N時， 單稱爲內容檔1 6 1。以下，在沒有必要個別區分利用條件 檔162-1至162-N時，單稱爲利用條件檔162。 接著，參考圖7說明顯示資料檔1 82之構成之例。圖7 (A )係顯示原始套件用顯示資料201之例圖。圖7 ( A ) 所示之原始套件用顯示資料20 1係由：對應儲存對應於顯 示資料檔1 82之套件之顯示資料之主表，辨識界定套件之 套件ID之資料、原始套件、我的套件、或過濾套件之其一 用之套件種類之資料、EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之其一之名稱 或CD等被設定之套件來源處、套件名稱之資料、藝術家名 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I------I----I -------—訂 i I----- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -26- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 Λ7 -—--- B? 五、發明說明（24 ) 之資料、風格名之資料、以及顯示對應套件之圖像被儲存 之圖像檔之資料、以及對應屬於套件之1以上之內容之內 容ID之資料所構成。 對應使用者所追加之原始套件之資訊，被追加於主表 ’或被追加於未圖示出之副表。 圖7 ( B )係顯示內容顯示用資料22 1之例圖。圖7 .( B )所示之內容顯示用資料22 1係由：對應儲存對應於內容 之顯示資料之顯示資料檔182之主表，內容ID之資料、界 定對應之內容所屬之原始套件用之原始套件ID之資料、曲 名之資料、可以結帳次數之資料、可以結帳最大次數之資 料，以及顯示對應內之圖像被儲存之圖像檔之資料所構 ' 成。 進而，顯示資料檔182如圖7 ( C )所示般地，也可以 使之對應內容ID，記錄資料種類與資料於副表。在副表記 錄與主表之資料種類不同之種類的資料，對應內容ID，與 資料種類一齊地，該資料被記錄於1個之記錄。 例如，在圖7 ( C )所示之顯示資料檔1 82之副表對應 內容ID爲“ 123XDES3”之內容，計算機碼（cyberC〇de )( 商標）、ISRC(International Standard Recording Code)、作 詞者名、以及作曲者名被記錄著。又，在圖7 ( c )所示之 內容顯示用資料221之副表，對應內容DI爲“ 123XDES4) 之內容，記錄：計算機碼、ISRC、再生期限、再生次數、 以及均衡器資料。 又’顯不資料檔1 8 2之副表記錄與套件之主表之資料 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝·-------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) -27- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 ____ B7 五、發明說明（25 ) 種類不同之種類的資料，對應套件ID，與資料種類一齊地 記錄該資料亦可。 如此’顯示資料檔1 8 2藉由利用副表，即使對應內容 之資料的種類被追加，不變更主表之方式，也可以彈性、 而且迅速地記錄被追加之新的種類之資料。 我的套件係使用者任意選擇之1以上之內容屬之。哪 個內容屬於我的套件係使用者可以任意編輯。內容可以同 時屬於1以上之我的套件。又，內容也可以都不屬於任何 一個之我的套件。The term of use refers to the content ID that can be used (checkout or recycling, etc.). The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------------- I --- I 丨 —Order --------- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) -23- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( 21) The period of the defined content. The applicable region is a region (for example, Japan, worldwide, etc.) in which the content defined by the content ID can be used (checkout or reproduction, etc.). The signature system stores data generated by the signature management program Π7 based on the data set in the content ID to the area where it can be used (hereinafter referred to as the signature data). The signature data is used to detect the tampering of the conditions of use. The arithmetic that generates the signature data of the signature management program 1 37 is a directional function, and is not provided to the content management program 1 11 except for the reason that it is provided to the content management program 1 11 based on the content ID to the data set in the usable area. There are difficulties in producing the correct attribution information. The purchased application 1 to 5 are sent to the EMD registration server 3 through the network 2-supplied or recorded on a designated CD and supplied. The purchased application 1 1 5 transmits the specified content to the EMD server 4_1 through the network 2 and receives the content from the EMD server 4-1 and supplies it to the content management program 111. In addition, when the purchased application 115 is received by the EMD server 4-1, a charge is applied. Next, the correspondence between the data stored in the display data file 82 and the content files 161-1 to 16 1-N stored in the content database will be described. The content stored in one of the content files 161-1 to 161-N belongs to the specified package. The kit is more detailed: one of the original kit, my kit, or filter kit. The original kit is the content of 1 or more, corresponding to the classification of the content of the EMD server 4-1 to 4-3 (for example, the so-called corresponding to the score), or a CD. The content belongs to one of the original kits, which cannot belong to a plurality of original kits. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) --------- II--pack — II order ----— I! Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -24- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (22) pieces. The original package to which the content belongs cannot be changed. The user can edit (addition of information, or change of additional information) a part of the information corresponding to the original package. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the display information 20 1 for the original package and the content files 1 6 1 -1 to 1 6 1-N which are included in the content of the prescribed original package contained in the display data file 82. Display Kit 20 for Original Kit 1 Series contains Kit Display 211-1 to 221-M. The kit display data 2 1 1 -1 is associated with the content display data 22 1-1 -1 to 221-1-1. The content display data 22 1 -1-1 corresponds to the content stored in the content file 1 6 1 -1. Data stored in the conditions of use of the content of 1 6 1 -1-stored in the use condition file 162-1. The content display data 221-2-2 corresponds to the content stored in the content file 161-2. Information on the use conditions of the content stored in the content file 1 6 1 -2 is stored in the use condition file 162-2. The content display data 221-1-i corresponds to the content stored in the content file 161-q. The data of the use conditions of the content stored in the content file 1 6 1 -q is stored in the use condition file 162-q. The package display data 211-2 is related to the content display data 221-2-1 to 221-2- ". The content display treasure 221-2-1 corresponds to the content stored in the content file 161-1 (q + 1). Information on the use conditions of the content stored in the content file 161- (q + 1) is stored in the use condition file 162-U + 1). Content display data 22 1-2-2 is stored in the content file 161- (This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I nnnnnnn 1 · I —mmm n I mnnn I Order by nnn ---- I ----- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -25- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (23) Q + 2). Information on the use conditions of the content stored in the content file 161-U + 2) is stored in the use condition file 162-U + 2). The content display data 221-2-j corresponds to the content stored in the content file 161-r. The data of the use conditions of the content stored in the content file 16 1 -r is stored in the use condition file 1 6 2 · r. Similarly, the kit display data 2 11-M system and the content display data 221-M-1 to 221-M-p are associated with each other. The content display data 221-M-p corresponds to the content stored in the content file 161-N. The data of the use conditions of the content stored in the content file 1 6 1-N is stored in the use condition file 162-N. In the following, when there is no # 必 I® distinguishing kit display data 211-1 to -2 1 1-M, it is simply referred to as kit display data 2 1 1-1. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish the content display materials 221-1-1-2 to 22-M-p individually, they are simply referred to as the content display materials 221. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish the content files 1 6 1 -1 to 1 6 1-N individually, they are simply referred to as content files 1 6 1. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish the use condition files 162-1 to 162-N individually, they are simply referred to as the use condition files 162. Next, an example of the configuration of the display data file 182 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 (A) is a diagram showing an example of display data 201 for the original kit. The display data 20 1 of the original package shown in FIG. 7 (A) is: a master table corresponding to the display data of the package corresponding to the display data file 1 82, the data identifying the package ID defining the package, the original package, my Information about the type of package or one of the filter packages, the name of one of the EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3 or the set package source such as CD, the package name information, the artist name, paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I ------ I ---- I --------- Order i I ----- (Please read the back first Please pay attention to this page before filling in this page) -26- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 Λ7 ------ B? V. Information on invention description (24), information on style names, and information on corresponding packages The image is composed of the data of the stored image file and the content ID corresponding to the content belonging to 1 or more of the package. The information corresponding to the original package added by the user is added to the main table 'or to a sub-table not shown. FIG. 7 (B) is an example of a display content display material 22 1. Figure 7. (B) The content display data 22 1 is used for: the master table corresponding to the display data file 182 storing the display data corresponding to the content, the content ID data, and the original package used to define the corresponding content. The data of the original package ID, the title of the song, the number of times that can be checked out, the maximum number of times that can be checked out, and the data showing the corresponding image is stored in the image file. Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (C), the display data file 182 may be associated with the content ID, and the data type and data may be recorded in the sub-table. The sub-table records data of a type different from that of the main table, corresponding to the content ID, and this type of data is recorded in one record. For example, the sub-table of the display data file 1 82 shown in Fig. 7 (C) corresponds to the content ID "123XDES3", the computer code (cyberCode) (trademark), ISRC (International Standard Recording Code), and the lyricist. First name and composer name are recorded. The sub-table of the content display data 221 shown in FIG. 7 (c) corresponds to the content DI of "123XDES4" and records: computer code, ISRC, reproduction period, number of reproduction times, and equalizer data. Display the data of the sub-table record of the data file 1 8 2 and the main table of the package. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------- Packing ------- Order --------- Line (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -27- Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 ____ B7 V. Description of the invention (25) Different types of data, corresponding to the package ID, it is also possible to record the data together with the type of data. So 'display data file 1 8 2 By using the sub-table, even if the content of the corresponding data The type is added, without changing the way of the main table, it can also flexibly and quickly record the data of the new type being added. My package is one or more of the content selected by the user. Which content belongs to me The package is editable by the user. The content can belong to more than 1 at the same time My suite. Further, the content can not belong to any of my kit.

圖8係說明屬於顯示資料檔1 82之規定我的套件與內容 之關係之我的套件用W录資料24 1與內容檔1 6 1至1 6卜N - 之關係圖。我的套件用顯示資料24 1係包含套件用顯示資 料 251-1 至 251-S 。 套件用顯示資料251-1對應使用者之設定，與內容顯示 用資料221-1-1、221-2-2、或221-1-i等被賦予關連。 同樣地，套件用顯示資料25 1-S對應使用者之設定，與 內容顯示用資料221-1-1、221-2-2、或221-Ι-i等被賦予關 連。 以下，在沒有必要個別區分套件用顯示資料25 1 -1至 25 1-S時，單稱爲套件用顯示資料251。 套件用顯示資料25 1具有與參考圖7 ( A )說明之套件 用顯示資料22 1相同之構造之故，其說明省略。 如此，使用者可以使任意之內容屬於我的套件，1個 之內容有屬於複數之我的套件之情形。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------- I---I · I----II 訂-----— II (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -28- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（26 ) 以被儲存在過濾資料檔1 8 1之過濾資料爲基礎之內容 屬於過濾套件。過濾資料由EMD伺服器4-1至4-3或WWW 伺服器5-1或5-2等透過網路2被供給，或被記錄於指定之 CD而被供給。使用者可以編輯被儲存在過爐資料檔181之 過濾資料。 過濾資料係成爲選擇指定之內容之基準，或算出對應 內容之分量之基準。例如，如利用對應本週之J-ΡΟΡ(日本 之流行音樂）最好前十名之過濾資料，個人電腦1可以界定 本週之曰本之流行音樂第1名之內容至本週之日本之流行 音樂第10名之內容。 過濾資料檔「8 包含：以在過去1個月間被結帳 _ 之期間長之順序選擇內容之過濾資料、選擇在過去半年間 被結帳之次數多之內容之過濾資料、或選擇曲名包含“愛 “之文字之內容之過濾資料。 如此，過濾套件之內容係使對應內容之內容顯示用資 料221 (包含於內容顯示用資料221由使用者設定之資料） 、或履歷資料1 84等與過濾資料對應而被選擇。 圖9係說明屬於顯示資料檔1 82之規定過濾資料與內容 之關係之過濾資料用顯示資料28 1與內容檔1 6 1 -1至1 6 1-N 之關係圖。過濾資料用顯示資料28 1係包含套件用顯示資 料291-1至29卜A 。 套件用顯示資料291-1與內容顯示用資料221-2-2、 221-1-2、以及22卜M-p等被賦予關連。 套件用顯示資料291-2與內容顯示用資料221-1-i、 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） — — — — — — — — — — — — — ·1111111 ^ « — — — — III» (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -29- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _______________ B7 五、發明說明（27 ) 221-2、以及221-2-2等被賦予關連。 同樣地’套件用顯示資料291-A與內容顯示用資料 221-1-1、221-2-j、以及221-2-2等被賦予關連。 以下’在沒有必要個別區分套件用顯示資料29 1 -1至 29卜A時，單稱爲套件用顯示資料291。 套件用顯示資料29 1具有與參考圖7 ( A )說明之套件 用顯示資料22 1相同之構造之故，其說明省略。 如此’藉由個人電腦1之處理被選擇之指定之內容屬 於過濾資料，1個之內容有屬於複數之過濾資料之情形。 接著，參考圖10說明EMD之登錄處理。將內容管理程 式1 1 1以及顯示操1乍呈式1 12安裝於個人電腦1，開始 - 使顯示操作指示程式1 1 2啓動時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2參 考預先被記憶於內部之URL(Uniform Resource Locator)等， 透過網路2接續於EMD伺服器3。 EMD伺服器3對顯示操作指示程式1 1 2傳送使顯示實 行登錄之處理用之畫面之資料。顯示操作指示程式1 1 2例 如如圖1 1所示般地，使EMD登錄按鈕3 1 1被配置之畫面顯 示於顯示器20。 EMD登錄按鈕3 1 1被點選時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2 對EMD登錄伺服器3與預先記憶之內容管理程式11 1之ID 以及登錄上必要之資料（個人電腦1之使用者之姓名、以 及信用號碼等）一齊地要求EMD登錄伺服器3預先記錄之 認證用鍵301以及EMD選擇程式131之傳送。FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between My Kit Records 24 1 and Content Files 1 6 1 to 16 and N-which are the relationship between the My Kit and the content of the display data file 1 82. My kit display materials 24 1 series includes kit display materials 251-1 to 251-S. The package display data 251-1 corresponds to the user's settings and is associated with the content display data 221-1-1, 221-2-2, or 221-1-i. Similarly, the package display data 25 1-S corresponds to the user's setting, and is associated with the content display data 221-1-1, 221-2-2, or 221-1-i. In the following, when it is not necessary to individually distinguish the package display data 25 1 -1 to 25 1-S, they are simply referred to as the package display data 251. Since the kit display material 25 1 has the same structure as the kit display material 22 1 described with reference to FIG. 7 (A), its description is omitted. In this way, the user can make arbitrary contents belong to my package, and one piece of content may belong to a plurality of my packages. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------- I --- I · I ---- II Order ------ II (please first Read the notes on the back and fill in this page) -28- Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (26) Based on the filtered data stored in the filtered data file 1 8 1 The content belongs to the filtering suite. Filter data is supplied through the network 2 from the EMD server 4-1 to 4-3 or the WWW server 5-1 or 5-2, or is recorded on a designated CD and supplied. The user can edit the filter data stored in the furnace data file 181. Filtering data becomes the basis for selecting the specified content, or the basis for calculating the content of the corresponding content. For example, using the filtering data corresponding to the top ten of J-POP (Japanese popular music) this week, the personal computer 1 can define the content of the first place of this week's popular music to this week's Japan # 10 in pop music. Filter data file "8 Contains: filter data of content selected in the order of the longest period of checkout in the past 1 month, filter data of content that has been checked out frequently in the past six months, or song title contains" The filter data of the content of the word "love." In this way, the content of the filter kit is the content display data 221 (contained in the content display data 221 set by the user) or the resume data 1 84, etc. The data is selected correspondingly. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between the display data 28 1 for filtering data and the content files 1 6 1 -1 to 1 6 1-N, which is a description of the relationship between the specified filtering data and content of the display data file 182. Display data for filtering data 28 1 Series includes display data for kits 291-1 to 29 B A. Display data for kits 291-1 and content display data 221-2-2, 221-1-2, 22 Mp, etc. It is related. The kit display material 291-2 and the content display material 221-1-i. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). — — — — — — — — — — — — — · 1111 111 ^ «— — — — III» (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -29- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _______________ B7 V. Description of Invention (27) 221-2, And 221-2-2, etc. are related. Similarly, 'suite display data 291-A' and content display data 221-1-1, 221-2j, 221-2-2, etc. are related. The following 'When it is not necessary to distinguish the display data for kits 29 1 -1 to 29 A, the display data for kits 291 are simply referred to. The display data for kits 29 1 has the display data for kits 22 described with reference to FIG. 7 (A). The description of 1 is the same because it is omitted. In this way, the designated content selected by the processing of the personal computer 1 belongs to the filtering data, and the content of 1 content belongs to the plural filtering data. Next, the EMD will be described with reference to FIG. 10. Registration process. Install the content management program 1 1 1 and the display operation 1 to the personal computer 1 and start.-When the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is activated, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is stored in advance. Internal URL (Uniform Re source Locator), etc., is connected to the EMD server 3 through the network 2. The EMD server 3 transmits data to the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 to display the screen for processing the registration of the display. The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 For example, such as As shown in FIG. 11, a screen in which the EMD registration button 3 11 is arranged is displayed on the display 20. When the EMD registration button 3 1 1 is clicked, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed. The ID of the EMD registration server 3 and the content management program 11 1 stored in advance and the necessary information for registration (name of the user of the personal computer 1) , And the credit number, etc.) are required to transmit the authentication key 301 and the EMD selection program 131 registered in advance by the EMD registration server 3 together.

EMD登錄伺服器3在判定接收內容管理程式11 1之ID 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------III —---— — — — ——II ^-------II (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -30- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 - _ B7 五、發明說明（28 ) 不是正當之情形，透過網路2將指定之錯誤信息傳送於顯 示操作指示程式1 1 2。內容管理程式1 1 1之ID不是正當時 ’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2無法取得認證用鍵30 1以及EMD 選擇程式1 3 1。 顯示操作指示程式1 1 2在由EMD登錄伺服器3接收認 證用鍵301以及EMD選擇程式131時，將認證用鍵301以及 EMD選擇程式131供給於內容管理程式1 1 1。 認證用鍵301以及EMD選擇程式131由顯示操作指示 程式1 12被供給時，內容管理程式11 1安裝EMD選擇程式 131、使之啓動之同時，對認證程式138供給認證用鍵301 。認證程式1 38將取彳¥芝認證用鍵301儲存於內部。 ' EMD選擇程式131啓動時，例如如圖1 2所示般地， 於顯示器20顯示開始與EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之其一接續 用之按鈕被配置之視窗。 例如，按鈕33 1被點選時，內容管理程式1 1 1啓動購入 用應用程式151，使購入用應用程式151與EMD伺服器4-1 接續。此時，認證程式138利用認證用鍵301，實行與購入 用應用程式1 5 1之相互認證之處理之同時，於購入用應甩 程式151使之實行與EMD伺服器4-1之相互認證之處理。 購入用應用程式1 5 1在相互認證之處理成功時，例如 ，於顯示器20顯示購入圖1 3所示之內容用之畫面。 例如，圖1 2所示之按鈕332被點選時，內容管理程式 1 1 1裝置即插即用之購入用驅動器141，使購入用驅動器 141與EMD伺服器4-2接續。此時，認證程式138利用認證 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------II-----^-------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -31 - 丨 1058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（29 ) 用鍵301，實行與購入用驅動器141之相互認證之處理之同 時，使購入用驅動器141實行與EMD伺服器4-2之相互認證 之處理。 購入用驅動器1 4 1在相互認證之處理成功時，例如， 於顯示器2 0使之顯示購入圖1 4所示之內容用之畫面。 同樣地，例如，圖1 2所示之按鈕3 3 3被點選時，內容 管理程式Π 1使購入用驅動器142與EMD伺服器4-3接續。 此時，認證程式138利用認證用鍵301，透過購入用驅動器 142實行與EMD伺服器4-3之相互認證之處理。 又，在圖12所示之檢查按鈕334被點選之情形，由 EMD伺服器1至芝其一接收內容時（即，購入內容時 ~ )，被接收之內容被儲存在內容資料庫1 1 4之同時，被預 先決定之指定的可攜式裝置6-1或6-3之其一所結帳。 接著，說明由被裝置於驅動器22之CD讀出內容而加 以記錄之一連串之處理。 圖1 5係顯示在EMD之登錄終了之情形，使顯示操作指 示程式1 1 2啓動時，操作指示程式1 1 2使顯示器20顯示顯 示操作指示視窗之例圖。 在顯示操作指示視窗配置：啓動錄音程式1 1 3用之按 鈕341、啓動EMD選擇程式131用之按鈕342、顯示進行報 到或結帳之處理之設定之區域用之按鈕343、顯示編輯我 的套件，即我的套件用顯示資料241用之區域用之按鈕344 〇 按鈕345被選擇時，對應原始套件之資料被顯示於區 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝--------訂--------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -32- '1058 '1058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（3〇 ) 域351。按鈕346被選擇時，對應我的套件之資料被顯示於 區域351。按鈕347被選擇時，對應過濾套件之資料被顯示 於區域351。 被顯示於區域35 1之資料係關於套件之資料’例如’ 套件名稱、或藝術家名等。 例如，於圖1 5中，被儲存在套件用顯示資料22 1-1之 套件名稱“第i “以及藝術家名“ A太郎“、以及被儲存 在套件用顯示資料22 1-2之套件名稱“第2 “以及藝術家名 “ A太郎“等被顯示於區域351。 對應屬於在區域35 1被選擇之套件之內容的資料被顯 示於區域352。被顯¥1令區域352之資料，例如爲：曲名、 演奏時間、或可以結帳之次數等。 例如，於圖1 5中，對應套件用顯示資料22 1 -2之套件 被選擇之故，被儲存在對應屬於對應套件用顯示資料22 1-2 之套件之內容的內容用顯示資料22 1-1之曲名“南酒場“以 及可以結帳之次數（例如，1個8分音符相當於結帳1次 ，以3個8分音符顯示結帳3次）、以及被儲存在內容用顯 示資料22 1 -2之曲名“北墓場“以及可以結帳之次數（以2 個8分音符顯示結帳2次）等被顯示於區域352。 如此，被顯示於區域352之可以結帳次數之1個之8分 音符顯示對應之內容可以結帳1次。 被顯示於區域352之可以結帳次數之休止符係顯示對 應之內容不能結帳（可以結帳次數爲〇 )。又，被顯示於 區域3 5 2之可以結帳次數之G調記號係顯示對應之內容之結 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------—裝 --------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -33- 丨 1058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（31 ) 帳次數沒有限制（幾次都可以結帳）。 又，可以結帳次數不單如圖1 5所示般地，以指定之圖 形（例如，圓形、星星、月亮等也可以）之數目顯示，也 可以數字等表示。 又，在顯示操作指示視窗配置：顯示與被選擇之套件 或內容賦予對應之圖像等之區域348。按鈕349再生被選擇 之內容（使對應內容之聲音輸出於揚聲器24 )時，被點選 〇 按鈕345被選擇，於區域351顯示對應原始套件之資料 之情形，選擇被顯示於區域3 5 2之指定之內容之曲名，做 消除之操作時，顯示**霞作指示程式1 1 2使內容管理程式1 1 1 消除對應被選擇之曲名之被儲存在內容資料庫114之指定 之內容。 圖1 6係說明按鈕34 1被點選，錄音程式1 1 3被啓動時 ’錄音程式1 1 3顯示於顯示器20之視窗圖。 錄音程式11 3由被裝置於驅動器2 2之CD，讀取被記 錄於CD之內容之演奏時間，使顯示於區域383。曲名不明 之故，在錄音程式113在顯示區域383之曲名之部份，“不 明“被顯示著。 被裝置於驅動器22之CD之標題以及藝術家名，兩者 都不明之故，錄音程式1 13在顯示CD之標題之區域381以 及顯示藝術家名之區域382分別顯示“不明“。 在顯示錄音程式113之視窗更配置：取得CD之資訊時 ，被點選之按鈕384、以及將由CD讀出之內容記錄於內容 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -34- 11058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（32 ) 資料庫1 1 4時’自動地進行將由（：〇讀出之內容是否被可攜 式裝置6-1至6-3之其一結帳之設定之按鈕3 85。 例如’按鈕3 85被點選時，錄音程式1 π顯示表示可攜 式裝置6-1至6-3之淸單之下拉選單。使用者由該下拉選單 選擇可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之其一時，個人電腦1於被選擇 之可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之其一自動地結帳由CD記錄之內 容。使用者由該下拉選單選擇“不結帳“之情形，個人電 腦1由CD記錄內容時，不進行結帳。 又’在顯示錄音程式11 3之視窗被配置指示被記錄於 C D之內容之錄音的開始之按鈕386。 圖17係顯不録首程式113由WWW伺服器5-1或5-2之 其一取得CD之資訊時，錄音程式1 1 3被顯示之設定由 WWW伺服器5-1或5-2之其一取得CD之資訊之屬性對話框 之圖。 在屬性對話框被配置設定由WWW伺服器5-1或5-2之 其一取得CD之資訊之區域401。例如，在區域401設定“ CDDB”時，錄音程式1 13對對應CDDB之WWW伺月艮器5-1要 求CD之資訊之傳送，例如，於區域401設定“ CDNEW JAPAN”（例如，提供與CDNW(商標）同樣之服務之公司或網 址之名稱）時，錄音程式Π3對對應CDDB之WWW伺服器 5-2要求CD之資訊之傳送。 於區域401設定“ CDDB”時’區域402以及區域403變 成可以設定。於區域402設定CDDB第1網址之URL ’於區 域403設定CDDB第2網址之URL。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） II-----------裝----———訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -35- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 Λ7 -— ___B7____ 五、發明說明（33 ) 在由WWW伺服器5-1或5-2之其一接收CD之資訊時， 記錄接收之資訊之索引（HDD21之其一之索引）被設定在 區域404。 按鈕405被點選時，錄音程式113透過網路2以錄音程 式1 1 3預先記憶之URL爲基礎存取指定之WWW伺服器，取 得CDDB第1網址之URL以及CDDB第2網址之URL之資 訊，如圖18所示般地，將CDDB第1網址之URL之資訊當 成設定於區域402之資訊之候補設定，將CDDB第2網址之 URL之資訊當成設定於區域403之資訊之候補設定。 使用者如圖19所示般地，如於區域401設定“ CDDB” ，於區域402設定C石5^第1網址之URL，於區域403設定 CDDB第2網址之URL，圖16所示之按鈕384被點選時， 錄音程式1 13以被設定於區域402之URL以及被設定於區域 403之URL爲基礎，接續WWW伺服器5-1，以對應被設定 於區域401之“ CDDB”之程序對WWW伺服器5-1要求CD之 資訊之同時，由WWW伺服器5-1接收CD之資訊。 圖20係說明按鈕384被點選，由WWW伺服器5-1接收 CD之資訊時，錄音程式113被顯示於顯示器20之視窗之圖 。以由WWW伺服器5-1接收CD之資訊爲基礎，錄音程式 113於區域381例如顯示“ Asynkronised”等之CD之標題。 以由WWW伺服器5-1接收之CD之資訊爲基礎，錄音程式 1 13於區域382例如顯示“ Kuwai”等之藝術家名。 以由WWW伺服器5-1接收之CD之資訊爲基礎，錄音 程式1 1 3在顯不區域3 8 3之曲名之部份例如顯示“ η e a t ”、 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------^ illlln ^» — — — — — — 1— ^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -36- 058 058The EMD registration server 3 determines the ID of the received content management program 11 1 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ III ----------- —II ^ ------- II (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -30- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7-_ B7 V. Description of Invention (28) No In a proper situation, the designated error message is transmitted to the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 through the network 2. The ID of the content management program 1 1 1 is not correct ’The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 cannot obtain the authentication key 30 1 and the EMD selection program 1 3 1. When the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 receives the authentication key 301 and the EMD selection program 131 from the EMD registration server 3, the authentication key 301 and the EMD selection program 131 are supplied to the content management program 1 1 1. When the authentication key 301 and the EMD selection program 131 are provided by the display operation instruction program 1 12, the content management program 11 1 installs the EMD selection program 131 and activates it, and then supplies the authentication key 301 to the authentication program 138. The authentication program 1 38 stores an authentication key 301 for accessing the Shiba ¥ Shiba. 'When the EMD selection program 131 is started, for example, as shown in FIG. 12, a window on which the buttons for starting the connection with one of the EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3 is arranged is displayed on the display 20. For example, when the button 33 1 is clicked, the content management program 1 1 1 activates the purchase application 151 and connects the purchase application 151 to the EMD server 4-1. At this time, the authentication program 138 uses the authentication key 301 to perform the mutual authentication process with the purchase application program 151, and simultaneously purchases the application program 151 to implement the mutual authentication with the EMD server 4-1. deal with. When the purchase application 1 51 is successfully processed for mutual authentication, for example, a screen for purchasing the content shown in FIG. 13 is displayed on the display 20. For example, when the button 332 shown in FIG. 12 is clicked, the content management program 1 1 1 is a plug-and-play purchase driver 141, and the purchase driver 141 is connected to the EMD server 4-2. At this time, the certification program 138 uses the certification that the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------- II ----- ^ --- ----- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) -31-丨 1058 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (29) Use key 301 for implementation and purchase At the same time as the mutual authentication processing of the driver 141, the purchase driver 141 is subjected to the mutual authentication processing with the EMD server 4-2. When the purchase driver 1 4 1 succeeds in the process of mutual authentication, for example, it displays on the display 20 a screen for purchasing the content shown in FIG. 14. Similarly, for example, when the button 3 3 3 shown in FIG. 12 is clicked, the content management program UI 1 connects the purchase driver 142 and the EMD server 4-3. At this time, the authentication program 138 performs a process of mutual authentication with the EMD server 4-3 through the purchase driver 142 using the authentication key 301. In the case where the check button 334 shown in FIG. 12 is clicked, when the EMD server 1 to Shiba receives the content (that is, when the content is purchased), the received content is stored in the content database 1 1 At the same time, one of the predetermined portable devices 6-1 or 6-3 is settled. Next, a description will be given of a series of processing for reading the content from the CD mounted on the drive 22 and recording it. Fig. 15 is a diagram showing an example of displaying the operation instruction window when the display operation instruction program 1 12 is activated when the EMD registration is finished. Configure the display operation instruction window: button 341 for starting the recording program 1 1 3, button 342 for starting the EMD selection program 131, button 343 for the area showing the settings for processing the check-in or checkout, display editing my package That is, the button 344 for the area used for displaying the data for my kit 241. When the button 345 is selected, the data corresponding to the original kit is displayed on the paper. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). ) ------------- Installation -------- Order -------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -32- ' 1058 '1058 A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention Description (30) Field 351. When the button 346 is selected, the data corresponding to my package is displayed in the area 351. When the button 347 is selected, the data corresponding to the filter set is displayed in the area 351. The data displayed in the area 35 1 is information about the package ', such as a package name or an artist name. For example, in FIG. 15, the package name “i” and the artist name “Ataro” stored in the package display data 22 1-1 and the package name “stored in the package display data 22 1-2“ The second "and artist name" A Taro "etc. are displayed in the area 351. The data corresponding to the contents belonging to the kit selected in the area 35 1 is displayed in the area 352. The displayed information of ¥ 1 order area 352 is, for example, song title, performance time, or number of times you can check out. For example, in FIG. 15, when the package corresponding to the display data 22 1 -2 of the package is selected, the content display data 22 1- corresponding to the contents of the package belonging to the corresponding display data 22 1-2 of the package is selected. The name of the song "Minamijobo" and the number of times that can be settled (for example, one 8th note is equivalent to 1 checkout, and 3 8th notes are used to display the checkout 3 times), and stored in the content display data 22 The song title "North Cemetery" of 1-2 and the number of times that can be checked out (displayed twice with two 8-point notes) are displayed in the area 352. In this way, one-eighth of one of the checkout times displayed in the area 352 can be used to checkout once. The rest sign of the number of times that can be settled displayed in the area 352 indicates that the corresponding content cannot be settled (the number of times that can be settled is 0). In addition, the G tone mark displayed in the area 3 5 2 for the number of times that can be checked out is the end of the corresponding paper. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------ ---------- Installation -------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -33- 丨 1058 Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by A7 B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Property Bureau V. Invention Description (31) There is no limit to the number of accounts (you can check out several times). In addition, the number of checkouts may be displayed not only as shown in FIG. 15 but also by a specified number of graphics (for example, circles, stars, moons, etc.), and may also be represented by numbers or the like. The display operation instruction window is provided with an area 348 in which an image or the like corresponding to the selected package or content is displayed. When the button 349 reproduces the selected content (outputs the sound of the corresponding content to the speaker 24), it is clicked. The button 345 is selected, and the information corresponding to the original package is displayed in the area 351. The selection is displayed in the area 3 5 2 When the title of the specified content is deleted, ** Xia is displayed as the instruction program 1 1 2 to enable the content management program 1 1 1 to delete the specified content stored in the content database 114 corresponding to the selected song title. FIG. 16 shows that when the button 34 1 is clicked and the recording program 1 1 3 is activated, the recording program 1 1 3 is displayed on the display 20. The recording program 113 reads the performance time of the content recorded on the CD from the CD installed on the drive 22, and displays it in the area 383. For the unknown song title, "unknown" is displayed in the part of the song title of the recording program 113 in the display area 383. The title and artist name of the CD installed in the drive 22 are unknown. The recording program 113 displays "unknown" in the area 381 where the title of the CD is displayed and the area 382 where the artist name is displayed. The configuration of the window displaying the recording program 113 is further configured: when obtaining the information of the CD, the button 384 that was clicked, and the content read from the CD are recorded in the content. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public Li) -------------- install -------- order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)- 34- 11058 Printed by A7 B7, Consumer Cooperatives, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, V. Invention Description (32) Library 1 1 4 o'clock, whether it will be automatically read by (: 0 whether the content read by the portable device 6-1 to One of the 3-3 checkout buttons 3 85. For example, when the 'button 3 85' is clicked, the recording program 1 π displays a pull-down menu of the list of portable devices 6-1 to 6-3. Use When one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 is selected from the pull-down menu, the personal computer 1 automatically checks out one of the selected portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 and is recorded by the CD. The user selects "no checkout" from the drop-down menu. When the personal computer 1 records the content from the CD, the checkout is not performed. Also, the instruction is arranged in the window displaying the recording program 11 3 The recording start button 386 of the content recorded on the CD. Fig. 17 shows that the first recording program 113 is obtained from the WWW server 5-1 or 5-2, and the recording program 1 1 3 is displayed. The setting dialog is obtained from one of the WWW server 5-1 or 5-2, and the property dialog box is obtained. The property dialog box is configured to set the CD from one of the WWW server 5-1 or 5-2. Information area 401. For example, when setting "CDDB" in area 401, the recording program 113 requests the transmission of CD information to the WWW server 5-1 corresponding to the CDDB, for example, setting "CDNEW JAPAN" in area 401 (For example, the name of the company or website providing the same service as CDNW (trademark)), the recording program Π3 requests the transmission of CD information to the WWW server 5-2 corresponding to the CDDB. When setting "CDDB" in area 401 ' Area 402 and area 403 can be set. Set the URL of the first CDDB website in area 402 'Set the URL of the second CDDB website in area 403. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) II ----------- install ------------ order --------- line (please read the back first Note: Please fill in this page again) -35- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 Λ7 ----- ___B7____ V. Description of the Invention (33) When the CD is received by the WWW server 5-1 or 5-2 In the case of information, an index (one of HDD21 indexes) of the received information is recorded in the area 404. When the button 405 is clicked, the recording program 113 accesses the designated WWW server based on the URL recorded in advance by the recording program 1 1 3 through the network 2 to obtain the information of the URL of the CDDB first URL and the URL of the CDDB second URL As shown in FIG. 18, the information of the URL of the CDDB first web address is used as a candidate setting of the information set in the area 402, and the information of the URL of the CDDB second web address is used as a candidate setting of the information set in the area 403. As shown in FIG. 19, the user sets "CDDB" in area 401, sets the URL of C5 5 ^ 1 URL in area 402, and sets the URL of CDDB second website in area 403. The button shown in Figure 16 When 384 is clicked, the recording program 113 is based on the URL set in the area 402 and the URL set in the area 403, and continues the WWW server 5-1 to correspond to the "CDDB" program set in the area 401. While requesting the CD information from the WWW server 5-1, the WWW server 5-1 receives the CD information. FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating that when the button 384 is clicked and the information of the CD is received by the WWW server 5-1, the recording program 113 is displayed on the window of the display 20. Based on the information of the CD received by the WWW server 5-1, the recording program 113 displays the title of the CD such as "Asynkronised" in the area 381, for example. Based on the information of the CD received by the WWW server 5-1, the recording program 1 13 displays an artist name such as "Kuwai" in the area 382, for example. Based on the information of the CD received by the WWW server 5-1, the recording program 1 1 3 shows the part of the song title in the display area 3 8 3, such as "η eat". The Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ------------- ^ illlln ^ »— — — — — — 1— ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -36 -058 058

五、 發明說明（34 )V. Description of the invention (34)

Planet”、 “Black”、 “ S o u Γ等之曲名。同樣地，錄音程 式1 13在顯示區域3 8 3之藝術家之部份，例如顯示“ Kuwar 等之藝術家名。 由WWW伺服器5-1接收2個以上之CD之資訊時，錄 音程式1 1 3使顯示圖2 1所示之對話框，使使用者選擇利用 哪一個之C D之資訊。 圖22係“ CDNEW JAPAN”被設定於區域401，按鈕384 被點選時，錄音程式1 1 3被顯示於顯示器20之設定檢索關 鍵字用之對話框。 按鈕431在檢索樂譜名之關鍵字檢索CD之資訊時，被 點選而被設爲有源（irtive )。樂譜名之檢索關鍵字被設 定於區域4 4 1。 按鈕432在檢索藝術家名之關鍵字檢索CD之資訊時， 被點選而被設爲有源。藝術家名之檢索關鍵字被設定於區 域 442。 按鈕433在檢索曲名之關鍵字檢索CD之資訊時’被點 選而被設爲有源。曲名之檢索關鍵字被設定於區域443 ° 按鈕434在檢索商品號碼之關鍵字檢索CD之資訊時’ 被點選而被設爲有源。商品號碼之檢索關鍵字被設定於區 域 444。 檢索CD之資訊時，按鈕431至434至少其中1個被設 爲有源。 例如，如圖23所示般地，在檢索藝術家名檢索CD之 資訊時，按鈕434被設爲有源，例如顯示“ Kuwai”等之藝 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -37- 501058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（35 ) 術家名之文字列被設定在區域442。 ’ 實行被配置於設定檢索關鍵字用之對話框之檢索用之 按鈕被點選時，錄音程式1 1 3以預先記憶之URL爲基礎， 接續於WWW伺服器5-2，以對應被設定在區域401之“ CDNEW JAPAN”之程序，以被設定在對話框之檢索關鍵字爲 基礎，對WWW伺服器5-2要求CD之資訊之同時，由WWW 伺服器5-2接收CD之資訊。 WWW伺服器5_2與CD之資訊一齊地，將顯示敦促與 被檢索之CD之資訊有關之CD之購入之圖像用之資料傳送 於個人電腦1。個人電腦1之使用者以顯示敦促CD之購入 之圖像用之資料爲基Ί，透過網路2，可以購入指定之CD - 之資訊。 圖25係說明實行被配置於設定檢索關鍵字用之對話框 之檢索用之按鈕3 84被點選，由WWW伺服器5-2接收CD之 資訊時，錄音程式1 1 3被顯示於顯示器20之視窗圖。以由 WWW伺服器5-2接收之CD之資訊爲基礎，錄音程式113於 區域38 1例如顯示“ 7 7 y夕口于4 X卜、、“等之CD之標題。 以由WWW伺服器5-2接收之CD之資訊爲基礎，錄音程式 1 13在區域382例如顯示“ Kuwai”等之藝術家名。 以由WWW伺服器5-2接收之CD之資訊爲基礎，錄音 程式1 1 3於顯示區域3 8 3之曲名之部份例如顯示y t: —卜〃 、、、：/歹氺7卜、” 3 V 0 ”、 、、V夕少"等之曲名 。同樣地，錄音程式1 13在顯示區域3 8 3之藝術家名之部份 例如顯示、夕7 <〃等之藝術家名。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------^--------^---------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -38- 8 Α7 -------— B7_ 五、發明說明（36 ) 錄音程式1 1 3在接收指定之CD之資訊後，錄音程式 u3在被指定於區域404之HDD 21之索引儲存CD之資訊。 -----------I--裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 按鈕3 84等被點選，接受CD之資訊之取得指示時，錄 音程式1 13開始檢索被指定於區域404之HDD21之索引。錄 音程式1 13於被指定在區域404之索引儲存CD之資訊時， 顯示圖26所示之對話框461，使使用者選擇是否利用被儲 存在被指定於區域404之索引之CD之資訊。 指示被配置於錄音程式1 1 3被顯示之視窗之內容之錄 音的開始的按鈕3 86被點選時，錄音程式1 13由被儲存在驅 動器2 2之CD讀出內容，將由CD讀出之內容與CD之資訊 一齊地供給於內容_ 程式111。內容管理程式111之壓縮 •線· 方式轉換程式1 34將由錄音程式1 1 3所供給之內容以指定之 壓縮方式壓縮，加密程式1 3 5將被壓縮之內容加密。又， 利用條件轉換程式1 3 6產生對應被壓縮、被加密之內容之 利用條件之資料。 內容管理程式1 1 1將被壓縮、被加密之內容與利用條 件之資料一齊地供給於內容資料庫1 1 4。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 內容資料庫1 14產生對應由內容管理程式1 1 1接收之內 容之內容檔161以及利用條件檔162，於內容檔161儲存內 容之同時，於利用條件檔1 62儲存利用條件之資料。 內容管理程式1 11於內容資料庫114儲存內容以及對應 內容之利用條件之資料時，將由錄音程式11 3接收之CD之 資訊以及利用條件之資料供給於顯示操作指示程式11 2。 顯示操作指示程式112以對應在錄音處理被儲存於內 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） • 39 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 ---- B7 五、發明說明（37 ) 容資料庫1 14之內容之利用條件之資料以及CD之資訊爲基 礎，產生原始套件用顯示資料201以及內容用顯示資料221 〇 如圖27所示般地，按鈕345被選擇時，在顯示操作指 示視窗，以對應在錄音之處理被儲存於內容資料庫114之 內容之原始套件之套件名稱（CD之標題）被顯示於區域 35 1，該套件被選擇時，對應於由CD被讀出之內容之曲名 被顯示於區域3 5 2。 錄音程式1 13被顯示之視窗之按鈕385被選擇（被設爲 有源）之情形，由CD被讀出之內容被記錄於內容資料庫 1 14時，如圖28所~示^1也，顯示操作指示程式1 12在顯示操 " 作視窗顯示顯示被記憶於預先被指定之可攜式裝置6-1至 6-3之其一之內容之曲名之區域481。 使內容之曲名對應於區域481，在區域481之最左邊顯 示顯示其之內容是否可以於個人電腦1 -1報到之標號。例如 ，位於區域481之最左邊之“ 0”係顯示對應於內容之曲名 之內容可以在個人電腦1 -1報到（即，由個人電腦1· 1被結 帳）。圖29所示之例爲區域481之最左邊之位置“ X”係顯 示對應於內容之曲名之內容不可在個人電腦1 -1報到（即， 未由個人電腦1 -1結帳，例如，由個人電腦1 -2被結帳）。 顯示操作指示程式1 1 2使內容管理程式1 11將記錄於內 容資料庫114之由CD讀出之內容於預先被指定之可攜式裝 置6-1至6-3之其一結帳。 如此，只需使錄苜程式11 3被顯不之視窗之按紐3 8 5成 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公爱） -------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) -40 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 Α7 ___ Β7 五、發明說明（38 ) 爲有源，由CD讀出之內容被記錄於內容資料庫1 1 4時，個 人電腦1可以使由CD讀出之內容於預先被指定之可攜式裝 置6-1至6-3之其一結帳。 顯示操作指示程式1 1 2於顯示操作指示視窗顯示區域 48 1時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2於顯示操作指示視窗顯示： 顯示被記憶於預先被指定之可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之其一之 內容所屬之可攜式套件（被記憶於可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之 其一之內容所屬之套件）之名稱之區域482、關閉區域481 用之按鈕483、以及使實行報到或結帳之按鈕484。 進而，顯示操作指示程式112於顯示操作指示視窗使 顯示區域48 1時，'顯ΙϊΓϊ桑作指示程式1 1 2於顯示操作指示視 -窗配置：設定對應在區域352被選擇之曲名之內容之結帳 之按鈕491、設定對應在區域481被選擇之曲名之內容之報 到之按鈕492、設定對應被顯示於區域48 1之內容名之全部 的內容之報到之按鈕493、以及取消報到或結帳之設定之 按鈕494。 接著，說明報到或結帳之設定、以及報到或結帳之實 行之處理。 顯不操作指不程式11 2在顯不進彳了報到或結帳之處理 之設定之視窗用之按鈕343被點選時，於顯示操作指示視 窗顯示顯示被記憶於預先被指定之可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之 其一之內容之曲名之區域481。 例如，如圖29所示般地，被顯示於區域352之曲名“ 南酒場“、曲名“北墓場“以及曲名“七排“被選擇之情 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -41 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 ----- B7 五、發明說明（39 ) 形’按鈕49 1被點選時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2如圖30所 示般地，設定對應曲名“南酒場“之內容、對應曲名“北 墓場“之內容、以及對應曲名“七排“之內容之結帳，於 區域48 1顯示曲名“南酒場“、曲名“北墓場“、以及曲 名“七排“。 又，對應曲名“王將“，位於區域4 8 1之最左邊之“ 〇”係顯示對應曲名“王將“之內容可以於個人電腦1 -1報到 。即，對應曲名“王將“之內容係由個人電腦1 -1被結帳之 內容。 又，對應曲名“步“，位於區域48 1之最左邊之“ X” 係顯示對應曲名‘7步內容不可以於個人電腦1 -1報到。 _ 即，對應曲名“步“之內容並不是由個人電腦1-1被結帳之 內容（例如，對應曲名“步“之內容係由個人電腦1 -2被結 帳之內容）。 又，對應曲名“角“，位於區域48 1之最左邊之“ X” 係顯示對應曲名“角“之內容不可以於個人電腦1 -1報到。 即，對應曲名“角“之內容並不是由個人電腦1 -1被結帳之 內容（例如，對應曲名“角“之內容係由個人電腦1 -2被結 帳之內容）。 對應曲名“飛車“’位於區域4 8 1之最左邊之“ 0 ”係 顯示對應曲名“飛車“之內容可以於個人電腦1 -1報到。即 ’對應曲名“飛車“之內容係由個人電腦1 ·1被結帳之內容 〇 對應曲名“南酒場“之內容、對應曲名“北墓場“之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝·-------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -42- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 __ _ B7 五、發明說明（40 ) 內容、以及對應曲名“七排“之內容皆由個人電腦i _丨被結 帳之故，對應曲名“南酒場“、曲名“北墓場“、以及曲 名“七排“’在區域48 1之最左邊顯示“〇”。 此時’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2將被顯示於區域35 2之對 應曲名“南酒場“之可以結帳次數由顯示3次之結帳之3 個8分音符變更爲顯示2次結帳之2個8分音符而顯示，將 對應曲名“北墓場“之可以結帳次數由顯示2次之結帳之2 個8分音符變更爲顯示1次結帳之1個8分音符而顯示，將 對應曲名“七排“之可以結帳次數由顯示3次之結帳之3 個8分音符變更爲顯示2次結帳之2個8分音符而顯示。 例如，由圖30矫杀狀態起，在區域48 1曲名“北墓場 “被選擇，按鈕492被點選時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2如圖 3 1所示般地，設定對應曲名“北墓場“之內容之報到，由 區域481消除曲名“北墓場“。 此時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2將被顯示於區域352之對 應曲名“北墓場“之可以結帳次數由顯示丨次之結帳之1個 8分音符變更爲顯示2次結帳之2個8分音符而顯示。 又，如將被顯示於區域35 1之套件名稱拖曳於區域481 ，屬於對應被拖曳之套件名稱之套件之全部的內容之結帳 被設定。 只在藉由按鈕49 1至494之操作之報到或結帳之設定’ 個人電腦1不實行報到或結帳之處理。 做完藉由按鈕49 1至494之操作之報到或結帳之設定後 ，按鈕484被點選時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2使內容管理程 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） _ -43- --------I----裝·---！| 訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（41 ) 式1 1 1實行報到或結帳之處理。即，按鈕484被點選時，顯 示操作指示程式1 1 2依據報到或結帳之設定，使內容管理 程式111對可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之其一傳送內容，或傳送 對應報到之指定之指令（例如，使可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之 其一記憶之指定之內容消除之指令等）之同時，使之更新 被儲存在對應傳送之內容或指令之利用條件檔i 62之利用 條件之資料。 報到或結帳被實行時，顯示操作指示程式11 2對應傳 送之內榮獲被傳送之指令’更新被儲存在履歷資料檔之履 歷資料。履歷資料係由：界定被報到或結帳之內容之資訊 、或其之內容被報到或+結帳之日期、或其之內容被結帳之 '可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之名稱等所形成。 報到或結帳之設定之處理可以短時間實行之故，使用 者可以迅速知道報到或結帳之處理之實行後之狀態，減少 花時間之報到或結帳之處理之次數，可以使報到或結帳所 需要之時間全體（包含設定以及實行）變短。 接著，說明於指定之我的套件加上所希望之內容等之 對於我的套件之編輯之操作。 如圖3 2所示般地，顯示操作指示程式π 2在使顯示進 行我的套件之編輯之區域用之按鈕344被點選時，於顯示 操作指示視窗使顯示顯示對應屬於指定之我的套件之內容 之曲名等之區域501。 此時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2於顯示操作指示視窗顯 示顯示被選擇之我的套件之套件名稱（被儲存在套件用顯 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -----------—裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) -44- 501058 Λ7 ___________ B7 五、發明說明（42 ) (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) 示資料251-2至251-S之其一）之區域502。於區域502設 定希望編輯之我的套件之套件名稱時，顯示操作指示程式 1 12於區域501使之顯示對應屬於具有該套件名稱之我的套 件之內容之曲名（被儲存在與套件用顯示資料2^4至 25 1-S之其一被賦予關連之內容用顯示資料221)。 進而，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2於顯示操作指示視窗使 之顯示區域5 0 1時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2於顯示操作指示 視窗配置：實行使對應在區域352被選擇之曲名之內容也 屬於套件名稱被顯示於區域502之我的套件之處理（在套 件用顯示資料251-1至251-S之其一儲存被選擇之內容用顯 示資料221之內容Ίϋϋ按鈕521、實行使對應在區域501 -被選擇之曲名之內容由套件名稱被顯示於區域502之我的 套件消除之處理（由套件用顯示資料251-1至251-S之其一 消除被選擇之內容用顯示資料221之內容ID )之按鈕522 、以及實行取消之前實行之處理（使內容也屬於我的套件 之處理、或由我的套件消除內容之處理之其一）之處理之 按鈕5 23。 經濟部智慧財產局員X消費合阼fi申製 例如，藉由對於顯示區域50 1之顯示操作指示視窗之 操作，使用者可以使曲名“北極星“之內容、曲名“流星 “之內容、曲名“南阿爾卑斯“之內容、曲名“大富豪“ 之內容、以及曲名“縫隙1 “之內容屬於“我的最愛1 “之 套件名稱被顯示於區域502之我的套件。 即，對應指定之操作，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2在“我 的最愛1 “之套件名稱被儲存之套件用顯示資料25 1儲存： 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -45- 501058 A7 __ B7 五、發明說明（43 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 曲名“北極星“之內容之內容ID、曲名“流星“之內容之 內容ID、曲名“南阿爾卑斯“之內容之內容ID、曲名“大 富豪“之內容之內容ID、以及齒名“縫隙1 “之內容之內 容ID。 又，如將被顯示於區域351之套件名稱拖曳於區域501 ，可以使屬於對應被拖曳之套件名稱之套件全部之內容屬 於套件名稱被顯示於區域502之我的套件。 被配置於顯示操作指示視窗之於區域35 1使顯示對應 我的套件之資料之按鈕346被設爲有源時，顯示操作指示 程式1 1 2如圖3 3所示般地，使於區域3 5 1顯示對應我的套 件之套件名稱（伊ί如>，《“我的最愛1 “、 “我的最愛2 “ -、“雪上驅車“、“南島選擇“、以及“海外旅行“等） ，使區域352顯示屬於對應被選擇之套件名稱之我的套件 之內容之曲名等。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 按鈕346被設爲有源，對應我的套件之資料被顯示於 區域351之情形，選擇被顯示於區域352之指定之內容之曲 名，進行消除之操作時’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2只消除對 應屬於套件之內容之內容ID之資料，不消除被儲存在內容 資料庫114之指定之內容。 接著，說明對應過濾套件之顯示、以及使過濾套件與 所希望之內容相對應之處理。 被配置於顯示操作指示視窗之於區域35 1使之顯示對 應過濾套件之資料之按鈕347被設爲有源時，顯示操作指 示程式1 12如圖34所示般地，於區域351使之顯示對應過 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -46- 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（44 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 濾套件之套件名稱（例如，“流行音樂最佳前十名“、“ 搖滾最佳前十名“、“演歌最佳前十名“、“愛情歌曲最 佳前十名“、以及“ 80年代流行音樂推薦“等），使屬於 對應被選擇之套件名稱之過濾套件之內容的曲名等顯示於 區域352。 圖3 5係說明過濾套件之產生之處理圖。顯示操作指示 程式112以被儲存在顯示資料檔182之內容用顯示資料 221-1-1至221-M-p以及被儲存在履歷資料檔184之履歷資 料，或其中之一，以及被儲存在過濾資料檔181之過濾資 料551-1爲基礎，產生套件用顯示資料291-1。 套件用顯示貪料Hi -1係儲存屬於對應套件用顯示資料 -291-1之過濾套件之內容之內容ID。 例如，套件用顯示資料291-1儲存以過濾資料551-1被 指定之1 0個之特定之內容（例如，對應流行音樂最佳前十 名之歌曲）之內容ID。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 顯示操作指示程式1 1 2以被儲存在顯示資料檔1 82之內 容用顯示資料221-1-1至221-M-p以及被儲存在履歷資料檔 184之履歷資料，或其中之一，以及被儲存在過濾資料檔 181之過濾資料551-2爲基礎’產生套件用顯示資料291-2 〇 套件用顯示資料29 1 -2係儲存屬於對應套件用顯示資料 291-2之過濾套件之內容之內容ID ° 例如，套件用顯示資料291-2儲存以過濾資料551-2被 指定之特定之文字列被包含在曲名之內容（例如’具有包 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -47- W1058 A7 ______— B7 ___ 五、發明說明（45 ) 含“愛“之文字之曲名之歌曲）之內容ID。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 同樣地，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2產生套件用顯示資料 291-3至291-A。個個套件用顯示資料291-3至291-A儲存屬 於對應個個套件用顯示資料291-3至291-A之過濾套件之內 容之內容ID。 例如，套件用顯示資料291-3以被儲存在履歷資料檔 184之履歷資料爲基礎，選擇在此1週間被結帳之次數最多 之10個之內容，儲存被選擇之內容之內容ID。 又，例如，套件用顯示資料29 1 -4隨機選擇演奏時間之 總計成爲60分之10個之內容，儲存被選擇之內容之內容 ID。 - -一- ' 如此，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2以被儲存在顯示資料檔 182之內容用顯示資料221-1-1至221-M-p以及被儲存在履 歷資料檔1 84之履歷資料，或其中之一，以及被儲存在過 濾資料檔181之過濾資料551-1至551-A爲基礎，產生過濾 套件。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 過濾資料551-1至55 1-A透過網路2由指定之伺服器被 下載，或例如由被記錄在指定之CD之驅動器22被供給。 又，使用者本身也可以製作過濾資料551-1至551-A。 例如，即使不變更被記錄在內容資料庫114之內容， 個人電腦1如果透過網路2，每天在指定之時刻將過濾資料 55 1-1至551-A由1以上之伺服器下載更新之，而產生新的 過濾套件，使用者利用所產生之新的過濾套件，可以享受 內容不同之組合。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -48- 501058 A7 -—________ B7 五、發明說明（46 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 接著，說明被顯示於區域3 4 8之圖像。如圖3 6所示般 地’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2在被顯示於區域3 5 1之套件名稱 被選擇，被顯示於區域352之曲名未被選擇（因此，內容 未被再生）時，於區域348使之顯示與對應被選擇之套件 名稱被賦予關連之圖像。 即，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2參考顯示被儲存於套件用 顯示資料2 Π、套件用顯示資料25 1、或套件用顯示資料 291之圖像檔名之資料，選擇圖像檔丨“-丨至183-Κ之其一 ’讀出被儲存在被選擇之圖像檔183-1至183-Κ之其一之圖 像資料，使對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於區域348。 例如，原始套件件名稱“第2 “被選擇，被顯示 " 於區域352之曲名未被選擇時，顯示操作指示程式112參考 顯示被儲存在套件用顯示資料2 1 1之圖像檔名之資料，讀 出被儲存在指定之圖像檔183-1至183-K之其一之圖像資料 ，將對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於區域348。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制衣 又，顯示操作指示程式11 2在被顯示於區域35 1之套件 名稱被選擇，被顯示於區域3 5 2之曲名未被選擇之情形， 指定之圖像被拖曳於區域348時，使被拖曳之圖像與對應 被選擇之套件名稱之套件賦予對應。 即，顯示操作指示程式11 2將被拖曳之圖像轉換爲指 定之方式（例如，JPEG(Joint Photographic Experts Group : 聯合圖像專家群）等），調整尺寸（例如，30像素X 30像 素等）、減少顏色（例如，256色等）、儲存、記錄於圖 像檔1 8 3之同時，將被記錄之圖像檔1 8 3之名稱當成顯示對 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -49_ 501058 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明（47 ) 應套件名稱之套件用顯示資料2 1 1、套件用顯示資料25 1、 或套件用顯示資料29 1之其一之圖像檔名而記錄之。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 如圖37所示般地，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2在被顯示於 區域35 2之曲名被選擇，內容未被再生時，於區域348使之 顯示與對應被選擇之曲名之內容被賦予關連之圖像。即， 顯示操作指示程式1 1 2參考顯示被儲存在對應於對應被選 擇之曲名之內容之內容用顯示資料221之圖像檔名之資料 ，讀出被儲存在指定之圖像檔183-1至183-K之其一之圖像 資料，使對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於區域348。 例如，原始套件之套件名稱“第2 “被選擇，被顯示 於區域352之曲名“ΐΐδΐ爾卑斯“被選擇，內容“南阿爾 卑斯“未被再生時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2參考被儲存在 對應於對應曲名“南阿爾卑斯“之內容之內容用顯示資料 221之對應圖像檔，讀出被儲存在指定之圖像檔183-1至 183-Κ之其一之圖像資料，使對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於 區域348。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 此時，在對應於對應被選擇之曲名之內容之內容用顯 示資料22 1沒有設定顯示圖像檔名之資料之情形，在按鈕 345被設定爲有源時，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2參考顯示被儲 存於該內容所屬之套件用顯示資料2 1 1之圖像檔名之資料 ，讀出被儲存在指定之圖像檔183-1至183-Κ之其一之圖像 資料，使對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於區域348。 同樣地，在對應於對應被選擇之曲名之內容之內容用 顯示資料22 1，未被設定對應圖像檔之情形，在按鈕346被 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -50- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _____ B7 五、發明說明（48 ) 設定爲有源時，顯示操作指示程式11 2參考顯示被儲存在 該內容所屬之套件用顯示資料25 1之圖像檔名之資料，讀 出被儲存在指定之圖像檔183-1至183-K之其一之圖像資料 ，使對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於區域3 4 8。 同樣地，在對應於對應被選擇之曲名之內容之內容用 顯示資料221，未被設定對應圖像檔之情形，在按鈕347被 設定爲有源時，顯示操作指示程式11 2參考顯示被儲存在 該內容所屬之套件用顯示資料291之圖像檔名之資料，讀 出被儲存在指定之圖像檔183-1至183-K之其一之圖像資料 ，使對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於區域348。 又，顯示操作指1F程式1 12在被顯示於區域352之曲名 - 被選擇之情形，指定之圖像被拖曳於區域348時，使被拖 曳之圖像與對應被選擇之曲名之內容賦予對應。即，顯示 操作指示程式1 1 2將被拖曳之圖像轉換爲指定之方式、調 整尺寸、減少顏色、儲存、記錄於圖像檔183之同時，將 被記錄之圖像檔1 8 3之名稱當成顯示對應曲名之內容用顯 示資料221之圖像檔名而記錄之。 如圖3:8所示般地，顯示操作指示程式11 2於再生對應 被顯示於區域352之曲名之內容時（由揚聲器24輸出聲音 時），於區域348使之顯示顯示輸出之聲音之各頻率頻帶 (例如，每音組（octave ))之信號位準之圖像（所謂之 頻譜分析器之圖像）。 又，由藉由使用者之設定，如圖39所示般地，顯示操 作指示程式1 12再生對應被顯示於區域352之曲名之內容時 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規袼（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝 -----訂·！ I 線 (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) -51 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（49 ) ’於區域348使之顯示顯示指定之期間之對應輸出之聲音 之時間的經過之信號位準之圖像。 如圖40以及圖4 1所示般地，藉由使用者之設定，顯示 操作指示程式112不顯示區域351以及352時，同樣地，顯 示操作指示程式1 1 2再生內容時，使顯示輸出之聲音之各 頻率頻帶之信號位準之圖像顯示於區域348，於不再生內 容時，使對應被選擇之套件或內容之圖像顯示於區域348 〇 接著，說明內容之結合處理。內容管理程式111在欲 結合之內容係屬於同一原始套件，欲結合之內容之可以結 帳次數相當於可以結帳最大次數（即，未被結帳），欲結 合之內容個別之可以結帳最大次數相等，再生期限等未被 設定時，實行結合處理。 如圖4 2所不般地’原始套件之顯不被選擇之情形’選 擇被顯示於區域3 5 2之2以上之內容之曲名（例如，曲名 “ Heat “以及曲名“ Sonic”）（即，選擇屬於同一原始套 件之內容），由編輯選單一選擇結合指令，內容管理程式 111結合對應曲名“Heat “之內容以及對應曲名“Sonic”之 內容，產生新的內容，儲存於新的內容檔1 6 1 ’記錄於內 容資料庫114。 內容管理程式1 1 1產生對應新被記錄之內容檔1 6 1 (對 應被結合之內容）之利用條件檔1 62，記錄於內容資料庫 1 1 4 〇 對應被結合之內容之曲名係由被結合前之內容之曲名 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ------------裝！ —訂·！ ---線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -52- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 __ B7 五、發明說明（5〇 ) 所產生。例如，如圖43所示般地，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2 對結合對應曲名“Heat “之內容以及對應曲名”Sonic “之 內容而產生之內容賦予“ Heat + Sonic”之曲名。 又，內容管理程式1 1 1由我的套件或過濾套件選擇內 容時，不實行結合（顯示操作指示程式1 1 2無法由視窗之 選單選擇結合指令）。 接著，說明內容之分割處理。內容管理程式1 1 1在欲 分割之內容之可以結帳次數相等於可以結帳最大次數（即 ，未被結帳），再生期限等未被設定時，實行分割處理。 如圖44所示般地，在原始套件之顯示被選擇之情形， 再生指定之內容Γ例飞Γ，曲名“ Butterfly “）時，由編輯 - 選單一選擇結合指令，內容管理程式111由再生對應曲名 “ Butterfly”之內容之位置分割，產生2個之內容，儲存於 新的內容檔1 6 1，記錄於內容資料庫1 1 4。 內容管理程式111產生對應新被記錄之內容檔161 (對 應被分割之內容）之利用條件檔162，記錄於內容資料庫 114° 對應於被分割之內容之曲名係由被分割前之內容之曲 名產生。例如，如圖4 5所示般地，顯示操作指示程式Π 2 於分割對應曲名“ Butterfly”之內容所產生之內容分別賦予 “ Butterfly(l) “ 之曲名以及 “ Butterfly(2) “ 之曲名。 又，內容管理程式1 1 1由我的套件或過濾套件選擇內 容時，不實行分割（顯示操作指示程式1 1 2無法由視窗之 選單選擇分割指令）。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------^裝--------訂---------^線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -53- 501058 A7 --^ B7 五、發明說明（51 ) (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) 接著，參考圖46之流程說明內容管理程式1 1 1以及顯 不操作指不程式1 1 2被安裝於個人電腦1，最初顯示操作指 示程式1 1 2被啓動時被實行之登錄之處理。 於步驟S 1 1中，個人電腦1之顯示操作指示程式1 1 2透 過網路2，參考預先被記憶之URL等，接續於EMD登錄伺 服器3。 於步驟S 1 2中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2對EMD登錄伺 服器3與登錄所必要之資料（個人電腦1之使用者之姓名、 以及信號號碼等）一齊地傳送預先被儲存在內容管理程式 1 1 1之內容管理程式1 1 1之ID。又，於步驟S 1 2之處理中， 顯示操作指示程式1 可以對EMD登錄伺服器3與登錄 — 所必要之資料一齊地傳送被預先儲存在顯示操作指示程式 1 1 2之顯示操作指示程式1 1 2之ID。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 於步驟S 1 3中，EMD登錄伺服器3接收內容管理程式 111之ID。於步驟S14中，EMD登錄伺服器3判斷內容管 理程式111之ID是否正當，在內容管理程式1 1 1之ID被判 斷爲正當之情形，進入步驟S 1 5，以個人電腦1之使用者之 姓名、以及信號號碼等爲基礎，進行個人電腦1之使用者 之登錄之同時，對個人電腦1傳送指定之數目之認證用鍵 (例如，使用於與EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之相互認證）。 於步驟S 1 6中，顯示操作指示程式11 2接收由EMD登 錄伺服器3傳送來之指定之數目之認證用鍵，於步驟s 1 7中 ，EMD登錄伺服器3對個人電腦1傳送EMD選擇程式131 。於步驟S 1 8中’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2接收由EMD登錄 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -54- 501058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制衣 A7 B7 五、發明說明（52 ) 伺服器3傳送來之EMD選擇程式131。 於步驟S 1 9中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2將接收之EMD 選擇程式1 3 1供給於內容管理程式11 1。於步驟S20中，內 容管理程式1 1 1啓動EMD選擇程式131，處理終了。 於步驟S 1 4中，內容管理程式ill之ID被判斷爲不正 當之情形，進入步驟S21，EMD登錄伺服器3不進行登錄 ’對個人電腦1傳送指定之錯誤信息。於步驟S22中，顯示 操作指示程式1 1 2接收EMD登錄伺服器3傳送之錯誤信息 〇 於步驟S23中，顯示操作指示程式112顯示接收之錯誤 信息，處理終了。~« 如此，個人電腦1最初啓動顯示操作指示程式1 1 2時， 例如，取得與EMD伺服器4-1至4-3之相互認證所使用之認 證鍵、以及EMD選擇程式131。 接著，參考圖43所示之流程圖，說明藉由錄音程式 1 13之由CD來之錄音之處理。於步驟S41中，錄音程式1 13 啓動驅動器2 2，讀出對應被記錄於被裝置在驅動器2 2 之CD之內容之資料（內容之數目、或錄音時間等），於指 定之視窗使之顯示被記錄於C D之內容之淸單。 於步驟S42中，錄音程式11 3判斷取得對應C D之資訊 之按鈕384是否被點選，在判斷取得對應C D之資訊之按 鈕3 84被點選之情形，進入步驟S43，時興對應C D之資訊 的取得處理。對應C D之資訊的取得處理之詳細，參考圖 44之流程，之後敘述。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------^ · -------^----!! *$ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -55- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（53 ) 於步驟S44中，錄音程式1 1 3在指定之視窗使之顯示在 步驟S43之處理所取得之對應C D之資訊。 於步驟S42中，在被判斷取得對應C D之資訊之按鈕 3 84未被點選之情形，沒有必要取得對應c D之資訊之故， 跳過步驟S43以及步驟S44，程序進入步驟S45。 於步驟S45中，錄音程式1 1 3判斷指示被記錄於C D之 內容之錄音之開始之按鈕386是否被點選，在判斷按鈕386 未被點選之情形，回到步驟S45，至按鈕386被點選爲止， 重複判斷之處理。 於步驟S45中，在判斷按鈕386被點選之情形，進入步 驟S46，錄音程式ΐΐϊΐ^在區域3 83對應曲名被設定之檢查 爲基礎，取得顯示是否錄音被記錄於C D之其一之內容之 內容選擇資訊。於步驟S47中，錄音程式1 13以內容選擇資 訊爲基礎，由CD讀出被選擇之內容。 於步驟S48中，錄音程式1 13使內容管理程式1 1 1之壓 縮方式轉換程式134將由C D讀出之內容例如以ATRAC3等 之指定之方式壓縮。於步驟S49中，錄音程式113使內容管 理程式1 1 1之加密程式1 35例如以DES等之指定之加密方式 加密壓縮之內容。 於步驟S50中，錄音程式113將壓縮加密之內容儲存在 內容資料庫1 14。於步驟S51中，錄音程式1 13產生對應儲 存在內容資料庫1 14之內容之利用條件之資料，於內容資 料庫1 14將產生之利用條件之資料儲存於利用條件檔162 ( 被對應於儲存在內容資料庫114之內容）。於步驟S52中， 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -----------—裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •56- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 -------B7 五、發明說明（54 ) 錄音程式u 3依據產生之利用條件之資料或對應C D之資 訊’更新顯示資料檔1 8 2。 於步驟S53中，錄音程式113判斷進行使由CD讀出之 內容是否於可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之其一結帳（自動結帳） 之設定之按鈕3 85是否爲有源，在按鈕385被判斷爲有源之 情形’進入步驟S54，啓動顯示操作指示程式11 2。 於步驟S55中，錄音程式113使顯示操作指示程式112 將儲存在內容資料庫114之內容於可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之 其一結帳，處理終了。 於步驟S53中，按鈕3 85被判斷爲不是有源之情形，沒 有必要結帳之故「步|S54以及步驟S55之處理跳過，處理 - 終了。 如此，如將按鈕3 85當成有源，使之實行由C D來之 錄音之處理，個人電腦1將由C D讀出之內容儲存在內容 資料庫114之同時，自動地使於可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之其 一結帳。 又，同樣地，檢查按鈕334被檢查之情形，在由EMD 伺服器4-1至4-3接收內容時，顯示操作指示程式112將接 收之內容儲存在內容資料庫1 1 4之同時，使內容管理程式 111於可攜式裝置6-1至6-3之其一結帳。 接著，參考圖44之流程說明對應圖43之步驟S43之藉 由錄音程式1 1 3之對應C D之資訊之取得處理。 於步驟S7 1中，錄音程式1 1 3檢索被記錄於指定之索引 (例如，在對話461之區域404被指定之HDD21之索引）之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -57- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7Planet "," Black "," Sou u Γ ", etc. Similarly, the recording program 1 13 is in the part of the artist in the display area 3 8 3, for example, "Artists such as Kuwar are displayed. When the WWW server 5-1 receives the information of two or more CDs, the recording program 1 1 3 The dialog box shown in Fig. 21 is displayed, so that the user can choose which CD information to use. Fig. 22 "CDNEW JAPAN" is set in area 401. When button 384 is clicked, the recording program 1 1 3 is displayed. A dialog box for setting search keywords on the display 20. The button 431 is clicked to search for the information of the CD name, and is set to irtive. The search keyword of the music name is set to Area 4 4 1. The button 432 is clicked to be active when searching for CD information by the keyword of the artist name. The keyword of the artist name is set in the area 442. The button 433 is the keyword of the song name When searching for information on CDs, 'is clicked and set to active. The search keyword of song title is set in the area 443 ° button 434. When searching for information on CDs by keyword of product number search,' is clicked and is set to have Source. Of product number The search keyword is set in the area 444. When retrieving information on a CD, at least one of the buttons 431 to 434 is set to active. For example, as shown in FIG. 23, when retrieving information on a CD by an artist name, the button 434 is set to be active, for example, the paper size of art papers such as "Kuwai" is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------- install- ------ Order --------- line (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-37- 501058 Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by employee consumer cooperatives A7 B7 V. Description of invention (35) The column of the name of the artist is set in area 442. 'When the search button that is placed in the dialog for setting search keywords is clicked, the recording is made Program 1 1 3 is based on a URL that is memorized in advance, continues from WWW server 5-2, and corresponds to the program "CDNEW JAPAN" set in area 401, based on the search keywords set in the dialog box. While the WWW server 5-2 requests the information of the CD, the WWW server 5-2 receives the information of the CD. The server 5_2, together with the information of the CD, transmits to the personal computer 1 the information showing the purchase image of the CD urging the information of the retrieved CD to the personal computer 1. The user of the personal computer 1 displays the information urging the purchase of the CD The image data is based on the information of the specified CD- through the network 2. Figure 25 shows the search button 3 84, which is used to implement the search button that is placed in the dialog for setting search keywords. When the WWW server 5-2 receives the information of the CD, the recording program 1 1 3 is displayed on the window of the display 20. Based on the information of the CD received by the WWW server 5-2, the recording program 113 displays, for example, the title of the CD of "7 7 y Xikou at 4 X, etc." in the area 38 1. Based on the information of the CD received by the WWW server 5-2, the recording program 1 13 displays an artist name such as "Kuwai" in the area 382, for example. Based on the information of the CD received by the WWW server 5-2, the part of the song title of the recording program 1 1 3 in the display area 3 8 3 shows, for example, yt: —Bu〃 ,,,: / 歹 氺 7 卜, " 3 V 0 ",", V Xi Shao ", etc. Similarly, the part of the artist name of the recording program 1 13 in the display area 3 8 3 < The name of the artist who waited.  This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------- ^ -------- ^ -------- -^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -38- 8 Α7 -------— B7_ V. Description of the invention (36) After receiving the designated CD information from the recording program 1 1 3, The recording program u3 stores the information of the CD in the index of the HDD 21 designated in the area 404.  ----------- I--install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Button 3 84 is clicked, etc. When accepting instructions for obtaining CD information, The recording program 113 starts searching the index of the HDD 21 designated in the area 404. When the recording program 1 13 stores CD information at an index designated in area 404,  The dialog box 461 shown in FIG. 26 is displayed, The user is allowed to choose whether or not to use the information of the CD stored in the index designated in the area 404.  When the button 3 86 indicating the start of the recording of the content arranged in the display window of the recording program 1 1 3 is clicked, The recording program 1 13 reads the content from the CD stored in the drive 22, The content read from the CD is supplied to the content_CD 111 together with the information of the CD. Compression of the content management program 111 • The line · mode conversion program 1 34 compresses the content provided by the recording program 1 1 3 in a specified compression method. The encryption program 1 3 5 encrypts the compressed content. also,  Use conditional conversion program 1 3 6 to generate corresponding compressed, Information on the conditions of use of the encrypted content.  Content management program 1 1 1 will be compressed, The encrypted content is supplied to the content database 1 4 together with the information on the conditions of use.  Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The content database 1 14 generates a content file 161 and a use condition file 162 corresponding to the content received by the content management program 1 1 1. While the content file 161 is storing content, The usage condition data is stored in the usage condition file 1 62.  When the content management program 1 11 stores the content and the data corresponding to the use conditions of the content in the content database 114, The information of the CD received by the recording program 11 3 and the data of the use conditions are supplied to the display operation instruction program 11 2.  The display operation instruction program 112 is stored in the recording paper. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). • 39-Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7- -B7 V. Description of the invention (37) Based on the information on the conditions of use of the contents of the content database 14 and the information on the CD, The display data 201 for the original kit and the display data 221 for the content are generated. As shown in FIG. 27, When button 345 is selected, When the operation instruction window is displayed, The package name (title of the CD) of the original package corresponding to the content stored in the content database 114 during recording processing is displayed in the area 35 1, When the kit is selected, The song title corresponding to the content read from the CD is displayed in the area 3 5 2.  When the recording program 1 13 button 385 of the displayed window is selected (set to active), When the content read from the CD is recorded in the content database 14:00, As shown in Figure 28 ~ 1 ^ 1, Display operation instruction program 1 12 in display operation "  An area 481 showing a song title stored in one of the previously designated portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 as a window display.  Make the title of the content correspond to area 481, At the far left of the area 481, a label indicating whether its content can be reported to the personal computer 1 -1 is displayed. E.g , The "0" at the far left of the area 481 shows that the content corresponding to the title of the content can be reported on the personal computer 1 -1 (ie, Checked out by personal computer 1.1). The example shown in FIG. 29 is the leftmost position "X" of the area 481, which indicates that the content corresponding to the title of the content cannot be reported on the personal computer 1 -1 (ie,  Not billed by personal computer 1 -1, E.g, Checked out by PC 1-2).  The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 causes the content management program 1 11 to check out the content read from the CD recorded in the content database 114 to one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 designated in advance.  in this way, Only need to make the recording program 11 3 the button of the window that is not displayed 3 8 5 The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public love) ------------ -Install -------- order --------- line (please read the note on the back first? Please fill in this page again for details) -40-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 Α7 ___ Β7 V. Invention Description (38) is active, When the content read from the CD is recorded in the content database 1 1 4 The personal computer 1 can check out the content read from the CD at one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 designated in advance.  Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 When the operation instruction window display area 48 1 is displayed, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed in the display operation instruction window:  Shows the portable kit belonging to the content stored in one of the pre-designated portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 (the content stored in one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 Area of the name of the package) 482, Close area 481 with button 483, And a button 484 for performing registration or checkout.  and then, When the display operation instruction program 112 displays the operation area 48 in the display operation instruction window, '显 ΙϊΓϊ 桑 for instruction program 1 1 2 In the display operation instruction view-window configuration: Set a checkout button 491 corresponding to the content of the selected song title in the area 352, Set the report button 492 corresponding to the content of the selected song title in area 481, Set a check-in button 493 corresponding to all the content names displayed in the area 48 1, And a button 494 for canceling the check-in or checkout setting.  then, Explain the settings for check-in or checkout, And the actual processing of check-in or checkout.  Display operation means not to program 11 2 When the button 343 for the window of the setting of the report or checkout processing is not displayed, The display operation instruction window displays an area 481 of the song title stored in one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 designated in advance.  E.g, As shown in Figure 29, The song title "Minami Brewery" displayed in area 352, The song title "North Cemetery" and the song title "Seven Rows" were selected. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm). ------ Order --------- line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -41-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 ----- B7 V. 发明 描述 （39） When the shape ’button 49 1 is clicked, As shown in FIG. 30, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed. Set the content corresponding to the title "Minami Brewery", Corresponds to the content of the song title "North Cemetery", And the checkout of the content corresponding to the title "Seven Rows", In area 48 1 shows the song title "South Brewery", Title "North Cemetery", And the title "Seven Rows".  also, Corresponds to the song title "王 将", The "〇" on the far left of the area 4 8 1 shows that the content of the corresponding song title "Wang Jiang" can be reported on the personal computer 1 -1. which is, The content corresponding to the title "King of General" is the content that is checked out from the personal computer 1 -1.  also, Corresponds to the title "step", The "X" at the far left of area 48 1 indicates that the corresponding song title '7 steps cannot be registered on the personal computer 1 -1.  _ which is, The content corresponding to the title "step" is not the content that was checked out by the personal computer 1-1 (for example, The content corresponding to the title "step" is the content that was checked out from the personal computer 1-2).  also, Corresponds to the title "Corner", The "X" on the far left of area 48 1 indicates that the content corresponding to the title "corner" cannot be reported on the personal computer 1 -1.  which is, The content corresponding to the title "corner" is not the content that was checked out by the personal computer 1 -1 (for example, The content corresponding to the title "corner" is the content that is checked out from the personal computer 1-2).  The corresponding song title "Flying Car" is located at the far left of the area 4 8 1 and the "0" indicates that the content of the corresponding song title "Flying Car" can be reported on the personal computer 1 -1. That is, the content corresponding to the track title "Speeding Car" is the content that was checked out from the personal computer 1 · 1 〇 The content corresponding to the track title "Minami Winery", The paper size corresponding to the song title "North Cemetery" applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------- Installation ------- Order- -------- Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -42- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 __ _ B7 V. Invention Description (40) content, And the contents of the corresponding song title "Seven Rows" were all checked out by the personal computer i _ 丨, Corresponds to the song title "South Brewery", Title "North Cemetery", And the title "Seven Rows" 'displays "0" at the far left of the area 481.  At this time, the "display operation instruction program 1 1 2" will change the number of billable times of the corresponding song title "South Brewery" displayed in area 35 2 from 3 8-note notes displayed 3 times of checkout to 2 times of checkout. Two eighth notes, Change the number of checkouts corresponding to the song title "North Cemetery" from displaying two 8-note notes for 2 checkouts to one 8-note note for 1 checkout, The number of billable times corresponding to the song title "Seven Rows" was changed from displaying three 8-note notes for three-time checkout to displaying two 8-note notes for two-time checkout.  E.g, Starting from the killing state in Figure 30, In area 48 1 song title "North Cemetery" was selected, When button 492 is clicked, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 Set the report corresponding to the content of the song title "North Cemetery", The title "North Cemetery" was eliminated by area 481.  at this time, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 will change the number of checkout times of the corresponding song title "North Cemetery" displayed in the area 352 from displaying an 8-point note of the second checkout to displaying 2 8-point checkouts Note is displayed.  also, If you drag the package name displayed in area 351 to area 481, Settlement of all contents belonging to the package corresponding to the package name being dragged is set.  Only the setting of check-in or check-out by the operation of buttons 49 1 to 494 'The personal computer 1 does not perform the process of check-in or check-out.  After completing the settings for check-in or check-out by the operation of buttons 49 1 to 494, When button 484 is clicked, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 Make the content management process This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) _ -43- -------- I ---- installation ·- -! Order --------- Line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _ B7 V. DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION (41) Formula 1 1 1 implements the processing of check-in or checkout. which is, When button 484 is clicked, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 According to the setting of check-in or checkout, Cause the content management program 111 to transmit content to one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3, Or send a specified instruction corresponding to the report (for example, Instructions for erasing the specified contents of one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3, etc.), It is updated and stored in the use condition file i 62 of the use condition corresponding to the content or instruction transmitted.  When check-in or check-out is implemented, Display operation instruction program 11 2 Corresponding to the instruction to be transmitted within the transmission 'updates the history data stored in the history data file. Resume information is provided by: Information defining what is reported or settled, Or the date on which it was reported or + checked out, Or its contents are formed by the names of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 that are checked out.  The processing of the setting of check-in or check-out can be implemented in a short time, Users can quickly know the status after the implementation of the check-in or check-out process, Reduce the number of time-consuming reports or checkouts, The time required for check-in or checkout (including setting and implementation) can be shortened.  then, Describe the operation of editing my package by specifying my package plus the desired content.  As shown in Figure 32, When the display operation instruction program π 2 is clicked when the button 344 for displaying the area for editing of my package is clicked, The display operation instruction window causes the display to display an area 501 corresponding to the song title and the like belonging to the contents of the designated My Suite.  at this time, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 The package name of my selected package is displayed on the display operation instruction window (stored in the display paper for the package. The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm)- ------------ install -------- order --------- line (Please read the phonetic on the back? Please fill in this page again for matters) -44- 501058 Λ7 ___________ B7 V. Invention Description (42) (Please read the note on the back first? Please fill in this page again for information) area 502 showing one of the materials 251-2 to 251-S). When setting the package name of the my package to be edited in the area 502, The display operation instruction program 1 12 displays in the area 501 the song title corresponding to the content belonging to my package with the package name (stored in the package display data 2 ^ 4 to 25 1-S and assigned to Content display material 221).  and then, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 When the operation instruction window is displayed in the display area 501, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 In display operation instruction Window configuration: Perform the processing to make the content corresponding to the selected song name in the area 352 also belong to the my package whose package name is displayed in the area 502 (display the selected content in the package display data 251-1 to 251-S and display Content of data 221221 button 521, The processing to delete the content corresponding to the selected song title in the area 501-the package name is displayed in the area 502 (removing the selected content by one of the package display data 251-1 to 251-S Button 522 showing content ID of data 221) As well as the processing that was performed before the cancellation (the processing that makes the content also belong to my suite, Or one of the processing to eliminate the content by my kit) button 5 23.  Member of Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs By operating the display operation instruction window for the display area 501, The user can make the content of the song "North Star", The content of the song title "Meteor", The content of the song title "Southern Alps", The content of the title "Big Rich", And the content of the song title "Gap 1" belongs to "My Favorite 1" The suite name is displayed in the area 502 of My Suite.  which is, Corresponding to the specified operation, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 In "My Favorites 1", the package name is stored. The package display data 25 1 is stored:  This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -45- 501058 A7 __ B7 V. Description of the Invention (43) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Content ID of the content of the song "Polaris", Content ID of the content of the song title "Meteor", Content ID of the content of the song title "Southern Alps", Content ID of the content of the song "Big Rich", And the content ID of the tooth name "Gap 1".  also, If you drag the package name displayed in area 351 to area 501, It is possible to make all the contents belonging to the package name corresponding to the dragged package name belong to the My package whose package name is displayed in the area 502.  When the display operation instruction window is arranged in the area 35 1 and the button 346 corresponding to the information of my package is displayed as active, Display operation instructions Program 1 1 2 As shown in Figure 3 3, Display the package name corresponding to my package in the area 3 5 1 (伊 ί 如 > , "" My Favorite 1 ",  "My Favorites 2"-, "Driving on Snow", "South Island Choice", And "Overseas Travel", etc.), The area 352 displays the song title and the like belonging to the contents of my kit corresponding to the selected kit name.  Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the button 346 is set to active, When the information corresponding to my package is displayed in area 351, Select the title of the specified content to be displayed in area 352, When the erasing operation is performed, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 only erases the data of the content ID corresponding to the content belonging to the package. The specified content stored in the content database 114 is not erased.  then, Describe the display of the corresponding filter kit, And the process of matching the filter kit to the desired content.  When the button 347 which is arranged in the area 35 1 to display the operation instruction window to display the data corresponding to the filter set is set to active, The display operation instruction program 1 12 is as shown in FIG. 34. The display in area 351 corresponds to the size of the paper. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -46- 501058 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (44) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) The kit name of the filter kit (for example, "Top 10 Best Pop Music", "Top 10 Best Rocks", "Top 10 Best Performing Songs", "Top 10 Best Love Songs", As well as "80s Popular Music Recommendations", etc., The song title and the like belonging to the contents of the filter kit corresponding to the selected kit name are displayed in the area 352.  Figure 3 5 is a processing diagram illustrating the generation of a filter kit. The display operation instruction program 112 uses the display data 221-1-1 to 221-M-p for the content stored in the display data file 182 and the resume data stored in the resume data file 184, Or one of them, Based on the filtering data 551-1 stored in the filtering data file 181, Generate kit display 291-1.  Package display Hi-1 is the content ID that stores the contents of the filter package belonging to the corresponding package display data -291-1.  E.g, The package display data 291-1 is stored to filter the specified contents of 10 specified data 551-1 (for example, (Corresponds to the top ten best pop songs).  The Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed a display operation instruction program 1 1 2 to be stored in the display data file 1 82, the display data 221-2-1-1 to 221-2Mp for the content, and the resume stored in the resume data file 184. data, Or one of them, And the filter data 551-2 stored in the filter data file 181 is used as a basis to generate the display data for the package 291-2 〇 The display data for the package 29 1 -2 stores the contents of the filter package belonging to the display data 291-2 for the corresponding package Content ID ° For example, The display data for the package 291-2 is stored to filter the data. 551-2 The specified character string specified in the song title is included in the content of the song title (for example, 'the paper size of the package is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ) -47- W1058 A7 ______— B7 ___ 5. Description of the Invention (45) Content ID containing the song title of "love".  (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Similarly, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 generates display data 291-3 to 291-A for the kit. The display data 291-3 to 291-A for each package stores content IDs corresponding to the contents of the filtering package corresponding to the display data 291-3 to 291-A for each package.  E.g, The package display data 291-3 is based on the resume data stored in the resume data file 184, Select the content with the highest number of checkouts in this week of 10, The content ID of the selected content is stored.  also, E.g, The display data for the kit 29 1 -4 randomly selects the playing time. The total becomes 10/60. Stores the content ID of the selected content.  --A- 'So, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is used to store the display data 221-1-221 to 221-2M-p for the content stored in the display data file 182 and the resume data stored in the resume data file 1 84. Or one of them, And filter data 551-1 to 551-A stored in the filter data file 181, Generate a filter kit.  Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Filtering data 551-1 to 55 1-A are downloaded from the designated server via the Internet 2. Or it is supplied, for example, from a drive 22 recorded on a designated CD.  also, The user can also create the filtering data 551-1 to 551-A.  E.g, Even if the content recorded in the content database 114 is not changed,  If PC 1 is over network 2, The filtered data 55 1-1 to 551-A are downloaded and updated by servers above 1 at a specified time every day. And new filter kits, Users take advantage of the new filter suite that is generated, You can enjoy different combinations of content.  This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -48- 501058 A7 -________ B7 V. Invention Description (46) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Then, The image displayed in area 3 4 8 is explained. As shown in FIG. 3, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is selected in the package name displayed in the area 3 5 1. The song title displayed in area 352 is not selected (hence, Content is not regenerated), In area 348, an image associated with the name of the selected kit is displayed.  which is, Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 Reference display is stored in the package. Display data 2 Π, Kit display data 25 1. Or the image file name of the display data 291 for the package, Select image file 丨 "-丨 to one of 183-K" to read out the image data stored in one of the selected image files 183-1 to 183-K, An image corresponding to the image data is displayed in a region 348.  E.g, The original kit name "No. 2" was selected, Is displayed "  When the title of area 352 is not selected, Display operation instruction program 112 Reference Display the data of the image file name stored in the display data 2 1 1 for the package. Read out the image data stored in one of the specified image files 183-1 to 183-K, An image corresponding to the image data is displayed in a region 348.  Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The display operation instruction program 11 2 is selected in the package name displayed in the area 35 1, If the song title displayed in the area 3 5 2 is not selected,  When the specified image is dragged over area 348, Corresponds the dragged image with the package corresponding to the selected package name.  which is, The display operation instruction program 11 2 converts a dragged image into a specified method (for example, JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group:  Joint Photographic Experts Group), etc.), Resize (for example, 30 pixels X 30 pixels, etc.), Reduce color (for example, 256 colors, etc.), Storage, Recorded at the same time as image file 1 8 3, Use the name of the recorded image file 1 8 3 as the display pair. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -49_ 501058 Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (47) Display information of the package according to the package name 2 1 1, Kit display data 25 1.  Or the package is recorded with an image file name of one of the display data 29 1.  (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) As shown in Figure 37, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is selected in the song title displayed in the area 35 2. When content is not reproduced, In area 348, an image associated with the content corresponding to the selected song title is displayed. which is,  Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 Reference display data stored in the image file name of the content display data 221 corresponding to the content corresponding to the selected song title, Read out the image data stored in one of the specified image files 183-1 to 183-K, An image corresponding to the image data is displayed in a region 348.  E.g, The package name "No. 2" of the original package is selected, The song title "ΐΐδΐ 尔贝斯" displayed in area 352 is selected, When the content "Southern Alpes" was not regenerated, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 refers to the corresponding image file stored in the content display data 221 corresponding to the content of the corresponding song title "Southern Alps", Read out the image data stored in one of the specified image files 183-1 to 183-K, An image corresponding to the image data is displayed in the area 348.  Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In the case where the content display information 22 1 corresponding to the content corresponding to the selected song title is not set to display the information of the image file name, When button 345 is set to active, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 refers to the information of the image file name which is stored in the display data 2 1 1 of the package to which the content belongs, Read out the image data stored in one of the specified image files 183-1 to 183-K, An image corresponding to the image data is displayed in a region 348.  Similarly, Display content 22 1 for content corresponding to the content corresponding to the selected song title, When the corresponding image file is not set, The button 346 is printed in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) on this paper scale. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION (48) When set to active, The display operation instruction program 11 2 refers to the information stored in the image file name of the display data 25 1 for the package to which the content belongs, Read out the image data stored in one of the specified image files 183-1 to 183-K, The image corresponding to the image data is displayed in the area 3 4 8.  Similarly, Display data 221 for content corresponding to the content corresponding to the selected song title, When the corresponding image file is not set, When button 347 is set to active, The display operation instruction program 11 2 refers to the information stored in the image file name of the display data 291 for the package to which the content belongs, Read out the image data stored in one of the specified image files 183-1 to 183-K, An image corresponding to the image data is displayed in a region 348.  also, Display operation refers to the song title of 1F program 1 12 displayed in area 352-when it is selected, When the specified image is dragged over area 348, Corresponds the dragged image with the content corresponding to the selected song title. which is, Display Operation instruction program 1 1 2 Convert the dragged image to the specified method, Adjust the size, Reduce color, Storage, Recorded at the same time as image file 183, The name of the recorded image file 183 is recorded as the image file name of the display material 221 for displaying the content of the corresponding song title.  Figure 3: As shown in Figure 8, The display operation instruction program 11 2 reproduces the content corresponding to the song title displayed in the area 352 (when the sound is output from the speaker 24), The frequency bands of the output sound (for example, An image of the signal level per octave) (the so-called spectrum analyzer image).  also, By user settings, As shown in Figure 39, Display operation instruction program 1 12 When the content corresponding to the song title displayed in area 352 is reproduced, this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation (210 X 297 mm) ------------ -Equipped ----- Ordered!  I line (Please read the Zhuyin on the back? Please fill in this page again for details) -51-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (49) 'An area 348 is used to display an image showing the signal level of the elapsed time corresponding to the output sound in a specified period.  As shown in Figure 40 and Figure 41, With user settings, When the operation instruction program 112 does not display the areas 351 and 352, Similarly, When the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed, Display the image of the signal level of each frequency band of the output sound in the area 348 When content is not regenerated, Display an image corresponding to the selected kit or content in the area 348. Next, Describe the combination of content. The content management program 111 belongs to the same original package as the content to be combined. The number of billable times for the content to be combined is equivalent to the maximum number of billable times (ie, Unchecked), The maximum number of times you can check out the content you want to combine is equal, When the reproduction period is not set, Implementation of combined processing.  As shown in Figure 4 2 "In the case where the original package is not selected", select the title of the content that is displayed in the area 3 5 2-2 or higher (for example, Title "Heat" and title "Sonic") (ie, Select content that belongs to the same original package), Select a single combination of instructions by editing, The content management program 111 combines the content of the corresponding song title “Heat” and the content of the corresponding song title “Sonic”, Generate new content, Stored in the new content file 1 6 1 ′ and recorded in the content database 114.  The content management program 1 1 1 generates a use condition file 1 62 corresponding to the newly recorded content file 1 6 1 (corresponding to the combined content), Recorded in the content database 1 1 4 〇 The song title corresponding to the combined content is the song title of the content before being combined. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------ ------ Install!  —Order!  --- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -52- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 __ B7 V. Invention description (50) is generated. E.g, As shown in Figure 43, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 assigns the title of "Heat + Sonic" to the content generated by combining the contents of the corresponding title "Heat" and the corresponding title "Sonic".  also, Content Manager 1 1 1 When selecting content from My Suite or Filter Suite, The combination is not implemented (display operation instruction program 1 1 2 cannot be selected from the menu in the window).  then, The division processing of the content will be described. Content management program 1 1 1 The number of times you can checkout the content you want to divide is equal to the maximum number of times you can checkout (ie, Unchecked), When the reproduction period is not set, Divide processing.  As shown in Figure 44, Where the original package display is selected,  Reproduction of specified content Γ Example fly Γ, Song title "Butterfly"), Edit-select a single combination of instructions, The content management program 111 is divided by the position where the content corresponding to the title "Butterfly" is reproduced, Produces 2 contents, Save in new content file 1 6 1 Recorded in the content database 1 1 4.  The content management program 111 generates a use condition file 162 corresponding to the newly recorded content file 161 (corresponding to the divided content), Recorded in the content database 114 ° The song title corresponding to the divided content is generated from the song title of the content before the division. E.g, As shown in Figure 4 5 The display operation instruction program Π 2 assigns the content of the "Butterfly (l)" and the content of the "Butterfly (2)" to the content generated by dividing the content corresponding to the "Butterfly".  also, Content Manager 1 1 1 When selecting content from My Suite or Filter Suite, Divide is not performed (display operation instruction program 1 1 2 cannot be selected from the window menu).  This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -^ Line (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -53- 501058 A7-^ B7 V. Invention Description (51) (Please read the Zhuyin on the back? Please fill in this page again) The content management program 1 1 1 and the display operation will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. The program 1 1 2 is installed on the personal computer 1. The first display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is the registration processing performed when the program is started.  In step S 1 1, Display operation instruction program 1 of personal computer 1 1 2 via network 2, Refer to URLs that have been memorized, etc. Connected to the EMD registration server 3.  In step S 1 2 Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 EMD registration server 3 and necessary information for registration (name of user of personal computer 1,  And the signal number, etc.) The ID of the content management program 1 1 1 stored in the content management program 1 1 1 in advance is transmitted together. also, In the process of step S 1 2,  The display operation instruction program 1 can transmit the ID of the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 stored in the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 in advance to the EMD registration server 3 and the necessary data.  Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In step S 1 3, The EMD registration server 3 receives the ID of the content management program 111. In step S14, The EMD registration server 3 determines whether the ID of the content management program 111 is valid. In the case where the ID of the content management program 1 1 1 is judged to be legitimate, Go to step S 1 5 With the name of the user of PC 1, And signal numbers, etc. When the user of the personal computer 1 is registered, A specified number of authentication keys (e.g., Used for mutual authentication with EMD server 4-1 to 4-3).  In step S 1 6 The display operation instruction program 11 2 receives a specified number of authentication keys transmitted from the EMD registration server 3, In step s 1 7, The EMD registration server 3 transmits an EMD selection program 131 to the personal computer 1. In step S 1 8 'Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 Received by EMD Register this paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Clothing A7 B7 Description of the invention (52) The EMD selection program 131 transmitted from the server 3.  In step S 1 9 The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 supplies the received EMD selection program 1 3 1 to the content management program 11 1. In step S20, Content management program 1 1 1 Start EMD selection program 131, Processing is over.  In step S 1 4 The ID of the content management program ill is judged to be improper, Go to step S21, EMD registration server 3 does not perform registration ′ The designated error message is transmitted to the personal computer 1. In step S22, The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 receives the error message transmitted from the EMD registration server 3 〇 In step S23, The display operation instruction program 112 displays the received error message, Processing is over. ~ «So, When the personal computer 1 starts displaying the operation instruction program 1 12 at first,  E.g, Obtain the authentication key used for mutual authentication with the EMD server 4-1 to 4-3, And EMD selection program 131.  then, Referring to the flowchart shown in FIG. 43, Explain the processing of recording from CD by recording program 1-13. In step S41, Recording program 1 13 Start drive 2 2 Read out the data corresponding to the content (number of contents, content, Or recording time, etc.), Display the list of content recorded in CD in the designated window.  In step S42, The recording program 11 3 determines whether the button 384 for obtaining information corresponding to CD is clicked, In the case where it is judged that the button 3 84 for obtaining information corresponding to CD is clicked, Go to step S43, Acquiring and processing the information corresponding to the CD. The details of the process of obtaining information corresponding to CD, Referring to the flow of FIG. 44, It will be described later.  This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------- ^ · ------- ^ ----! !  * $ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -55- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _ B7 V. Invention Description (53) In step S44, The recording program 1 1 3 displays the corresponding CD information obtained in the processing of step S43 in a designated window.  In step S42, In the case where it is judged that the button 3 84 corresponding to the information of CD is not clicked, It is not necessary to obtain the information corresponding to c D,  Skip step S43 and step S44, The program proceeds to step S45.  In step S45, The recording program 1 1 3 determines whether the button 386 indicating the start of the recording of the content recorded in the CD is clicked, When it is judged that the button 386 is not clicked, Returning to step S45, Until button 386 is clicked,  Repeat the judgment process.  In step S45, When the judgment button 386 is clicked, Go to step S46, The recording program ΐΐϊΐ ^ is based on the check that the corresponding song title is set in zone 3 83. Obtains content selection information showing whether or not a recording is recorded in one of the CD contents. In step S47, Recording program 1 13 is based on content selection information, The selected content is read from the CD.  In step S48, The recording program 1 13 causes the compression mode conversion program 134 of the content management program 1 1 1 to compress the content read out by the CD, for example, in a specified manner such as ATRAC3. In step S49, The recording program 113 makes the content management program 1 1 1 encrypt the program 1 35 and encrypt the compressed content in a specified encryption method such as DES.  In step S50, The recording program 113 stores the compressed and encrypted content in the content database 114. In step S51, The recording program 1 13 generates data corresponding to the use conditions of the content stored in the content database 1 14. The generated usage condition data is stored in the content database 114 in the usage condition file 162 (corresponding to the content stored in the content database 114). In step S52,  This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) • 56- Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 ------- B7 V. Description of the invention (54) The recording program u 3 updates the display data file 1 8 2 according to the generated use condition data or the information corresponding to CD.  In step S53, The recording program 113 judges whether or not the button 3 85 for setting the checkout (automatic checkout) of the content read from the CD to one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3 is active, In the case where the button 385 is judged to be active ', the process proceeds to step S54, Start display operation instruction program 11 2.  In step S55, The recording program 113 causes the display operation instruction program 112 to check out the content stored in the content database 114 on one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3, Processing is over.  In step S53, If the button 3 85 is judged as not active, It is not necessary to check out "Steps S54 and S55 are skipped, Processing-End.  in this way, If the button 3 85 is active, To implement the recording process from CD, While the personal computer 1 stores the content read by CD in the content database 114, Checkout is automatically performed at one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3.  also, Similarly, If the check button 334 is checked, When receiving content from EMD servers 4-1 to 4-3, While the display operation instruction program 112 stores the received content in the content database 1 1 4, The content management program 111 is checked out on one of the portable devices 6-1 to 6-3.  then, With reference to the flow chart of FIG. 44, the process of obtaining information corresponding to CD by recording program 1 1 3 corresponding to step S43 of FIG. 43 will be described.  In step S71, The recording program 1 1 3 retrieves records that are recorded at a specified index (for example, The index of the HDD21 specified in the area 404 of the dialogue 461) is based on the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------- installed --- ----- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -57- Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7

五、發明說明（55 ) 資訊。 於步驟S72中，錄音程式113以對應被記錄於被裝置在 驅動器2 2之CD之內容之資料（例如，曲數、或演奏時間 等）爲基礎，判斷對應C D之資訊是否被記錄於指定之索 引’在判斷對應C D之資訊未被記錄於指定之索引之情形 ’進入步驟S73，以被設定於區域401之文字列爲基礎，判 斷CDNEW是否被選擇。 於步驟S73中，在判斷CDNEW被選擇之情形，進入步 驟S74，錄音程式113透過網路2，接續於對應CDNEW之 伺服器（例如，WWW伺服器5-2 )。於步驟S75中，錄音 程式11 3使輸入檢索丽1建字用之畫面（例如，圖2 2所示 之對話框）顯示於顯示器20。於步驟S76中，錄音程式U3 將以畫面爲基礎被輸入之樂譜名、藝術家名、曲名、或商 品號碼等之檢索關鍵字傳送於對應CDNEW之伺服器。 於步驟S77中，錄音程式113由對應CDNEW之伺服器 接收對應C D之資訊。 於步驟S78爭，錄音程式113使對應C D之資訊與內容 對應，處理終了。 於步驟S73中，在判斷CDNEW未被選擇之情形，即， CDDB被選擇之故，進入步驟S79，錄音程式113透過網路 2，以被設定在區域402之CDDB第1網址之URL以及被設 定在區域403之CDDB第2網址之URL爲基礎，接續於對應 CDDB之伺服器（例如，WWW伺服器5-1 )。於步驟S80 中，錄音程式11 3將對應於被記錄在C D之內容演奏時間 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裳------— —訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -58- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 -—______ B7 五、發明說明（56 ) 之資料傳送於對應CDDB之伺服器。 於步驟S81中，錄音程式1 13由對應CDDB之伺服器接 收對應C D之資訊。 於步驟S82中，錄音程式1 13判斷對應由對應CDDB之 伺服器接收之CD之資料是否有2個以上之候補，在被判斷 爲具有2個以上之候補之情形，進入步驟S83，顯示使使 用者選擇利用其一之C D之資訊之對話框。 於步驟S84中，錄音程式113以對對話框之輸入爲基礎 ’選擇其一之候補，進入步驟S78，使對應C D之資訊與 內容對應，處理終了。 於步驟S82中，在被判斷沒有2個以上之候補之情形 ’程序進入步驟S78，錄音程式1 13使由對應CDDB之伺服 器接收之對應C D之資訊與內容對應，處理終了。 於步驟S72中，在判斷對應C D之資訊被記錄於指定 之索引之情形，進入步驟S85，錄音程式1 13讀出被記錄之 對應CD之資訊，進入步驟S78，使讀出之對應CD之資 訊與內容對應，處理終了。 如上述般地，錄音程式1 1 3由檢索之程序不同之2以 上之伺服器之其一取得對應C D之資訊。又，錄音程式1 1 3 取得過去對應C D之資訊而記錄之情形，利用其記錄之資 訊。 接著’參考圖49之流程圖說明藉由顯示操作指示程 式1 1 2之對顯示資料檔1 82之資料之記錄處理。於步驟S9 1 中，顯示操作指示程式112於顯示資料檔182之主表產生記 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------- - - -----訂------I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -59- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 Λ7 --- B7 五、發明說明（57 ) 錄。 於步驟S92中，顯示操作指示程式11 2讀出記錄於顯示 資料檔1 82之資料之種類。於步驟S93中，顯示操作指示程 式1 1 2判定在步驟S92讀出之資料之種類是否爲記錄在顯示 資料檔1 82之主表之資料之種類，在被判定讀出之資料之 種類爲記錄在主表之資料之種類之情形，進入步驟S94， 於主表之記錄的對應資料之種類之項目記錄資料’進入步 驟 S95。 於步驟S95中，顯示操作指示程式11 2判定是否記錄全 部之資料，在被判定還沒有記錄全部之資料之情形’回到 步驟S9 1，重複資料芝15錄處理。 - 於步驟S95中，在被判定記錄全部之資料之情形’處 理終了。 於步驟S93中，被判定讀出之資料的種類不是記錄在 主表之資料之種類之情形，進入步驟s 9 6 ’顯示操作指示 程式112於顯示資料檔182之副表產生記錄。於步驟S97中 ，顯示操作指示程式11 2在步驟S96產生之副表之記錄之項 目記錄資料之種類。於步驟S 9 8中’顯7K操作指不程式1 1 2 於步驟S96產生之副表的記錄之項目記錄資料，進入步驟 S95，實行是否記錄全部之資料之判定。 如此，顯示操作指示程式Π 2可以於顯示資料檔1 82之 主表記錄指定之種類的資料之同時’於顯示資料檔1 82之 副表記錄資料之種類以及其之資料（被記錄於主表之種類 以外之種類的資料）。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 x 297公爱） ------------- ^--------^---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -60- 501058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（58 ) 接著，參考圖50之流程圖說明藉由顯示操作指示程式 U2之由顯示資料檔ι82之資料之讀出處理。於步驟Si〇1中 ’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2取得對應進行讀出之內容之內容 ID或套件id。於步驟s 1 02中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2取得 讀出之資料之種類。 於步驟S 1 03中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2判定在步驟 S 1 02中取得之讀出資料之種類是否爲記錄在顯示資料檔丨82 之主表之資料之種類，在被判定爲記錄於主表之資料之種 類之情形，進入步驟S 104，由顯示資料檔1 82之主表讀出 與內容ID或套件ID—致之記錄。於步驟S105中，顯示操 作指示程式1 1 2由在驟S 1 04之處理所讀出之記錄讀出以 指定之項目被記錄之對應讀出資料之種類之資料，處理終 了。 於步驟S 1 03中，在被判定不是記錄於主表之資料之種 類之情形，讀出之資料未被記錄於副表之故，進入步驟 S 1 06，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2由顯示資料檔1 82之副表讀出 與內容ID或套件ID —致之記錄。於步驟S107中，顯示操 作指示程式1 1 2判定被儲存在步驟S 1 06之處理所讀出之記 錄之項目之資料之種類是否與讀出之資料之種類一致，在 被判定被儲存在讀出之記錄之項目之資料之種類不與讀出 之資料之種類一致之情形，回到步驟S 1 06，重複由副表之 記錄之讀出處理。 於步驟S 1 07中，在被判定被儲存在讀出之記錄之項目 之資料之種類與讀出之資料之種類一致之情形’進入步驟 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----------I--裝-------—訂------ I 線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -61 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（59 ) S1 08，顯示操作指示程式112由記錄讀出資料，處理終了 〇 如此，顯示操作指示程式Η 2可以由顯示資料檔i 82讀 出指定之種類之資料。 接著，例如，參考圖5 1之流程說明按鈕437被點選時 ’被實行之藉由顯示操作指示程式1 1 2之過濾套件之產生 之處理。於步驟S 1 11中，顯示操作指示程式11 2選擇被儲 存在過濾資料檔1 8 1之最初之過濾資料55 1、例如，過濾資 料551-卜 於步驟S 1 1 2中，顯示操作指示程式11 2以被儲存在顯 示資料檔1 82之資]4二~1!及被儲存在履歷資料檔184之履歷 _ 資料、或其一，以及被選擇之過濾資料551爲基礎，算出 對於內容之分量。 於步驟S 1 1 3中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2以在步驟S 11 2 之處理算出之對內容之分量爲基礎，選擇屬於對應被選擇 之過濾資料551之過濾套件之內容。 於步驟S 1 1 4中，顯示操作指示程式11 2將在步驟S 11 3 被選擇之內容登錄於對應被選擇之過濾資料55 1之過濾套 件。即，顯示操作指示程式11 2將對應被選擇之內容之內 容ID儲存在對應於對應被選擇之過濾資料55 1之過濾套件 之套件用顯示資料291。 於步驟S 1 1 5中，顯示操作指示程式11 2判斷在對應被 儲存於過濾資料檔1 8 1之全部之過濾資料55 1之過濾套件是 否登錄內容，在被判斷爲於對應全部之過濾資料55 1之過 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------裝--------訂---------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -62- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 __ _ B7 五、發明說明（60 ) 濾套件沒有登錄內容之情形，進入步驟s 1 07，選擇被儲存 再過濾資料檔1 8 1之下一過濾資料5 5 1，回到步驟S 11 2， 重複內容之登錄處理。 於步驟S 1 1 5中，在被判斷爲於對應全部之過濾資料 55 1之過濾套件登錄內容之情形，處理終了。 如此，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2以被儲存在顯示資料檔 182之資料、以及被儲存在履歷資料檔184之履歷資料、或 其一’以及被選擇之過濾資料551爲基礎，選擇內容，將 選擇之內容登錄於過濾套件。 接者’參考圖5 2之流程說明例如於顯示操作指示視窗 顯示區域48 1時’顯完1|作指示程式1 1 2以及內容管理程式 —1 1 1實行之結帳或報到之處理。 於步驟S 1 2 1中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2由顯示資料檔 1 82讀出對應內容之可以結帳次數。於步驟s 1 1 2中，顯示 操作指示程式1 1 2顯示在步驟S 1 2 1讀出之可以結帳次數。 於步驟S 1 23中，顯示操作指示程式11 2判斷設定結帳 之按鈕49 1或設定報到之按鈕492是否被點選，在被判斷爲 設定結帳之按鈕49 1或設定報到之按鈕492被點選之情形， 進入步驟S1 24，設定對應在區域352被選擇之曲名之內容 之結帳、或對應在區域48 1被選擇之曲名之內容之報到。 於步驟S125中，顯示操作指示程式112對應對應在步 驟S 124實行之以區域352被選擇之曲名之內容之結帳、或 對應在區域48 1被選擇之曲名之內容之報到之設定，更新 顯示資料檔182之內容用顯示資料221之可以結帳次數，回 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --II I — — — — — — — — · 1 I I I I I I 訂 — — — — — — — — — (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -63- 501058 A7V. Invention Description (55) Information. In step S72, the recording program 113 judges whether or not the information corresponding to the CD is recorded in the designated one based on the data (for example, the number of songs, or the playing time, etc.) corresponding to the content recorded on the CD installed in the drive 22. The index 'in the case where it is determined that the information corresponding to the CD has not been recorded in the designated index' proceeds to step S73, and based on the character string set in the area 401, it is determined whether CDNEW is selected. In step S73, when it is judged that CDNEW is selected, it proceeds to step S74, and the recording program 113 is connected to a server corresponding to the CDNEW (for example, WWW server 5-2) through the network 2. In step S75, the recording program 11 3 displays a screen (for example, a dialog box shown in FIG. 22) for inputting and retrieving the characters of Li 1 on the display 20. In step S76, the recording program U3 transmits the search keywords such as the score, artist name, song name, or product number entered on the basis of the screen to the server corresponding to CDNEW. In step S77, the recording program 113 receives the information of the corresponding CD from the server corresponding to the CDNEW. In step S78, the recording program 113 matches the information and content corresponding to CD, and the processing ends. In step S73, when it is judged that CDNEW is not selected, that is, because CDDB is selected, the process proceeds to step S79, and the recording program 113 via the network 2 is set to the URL of the CDDB first web address set in the area 402 and is set. Based on the URL of the CDDB second web site in the area 403, it is connected to a server corresponding to the CDDB (for example, WWW server 5-1). In step S80, the recording program 11 3 will correspond to the content playing time recorded on the CD. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ----------- --Shang ---------- Order --------- line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -58- Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 -—______ B7 V. The data of invention description (56) is transmitted to the server corresponding to CDDB. In step S81, the recording program 113 receives the information of the corresponding CD from the server corresponding to the CDDB. In step S82, the recording program 113 determines whether there are more than two candidates for the data corresponding to the CD received by the server corresponding to the CDDB. In the case where it is judged that there are more than two candidates, it proceeds to step S83 to display the use The user chooses to use one of the CD information dialogs. In step S84, the recording program 113 selects one of the candidates based on the input to the dialog box, and proceeds to step S78, so that the information corresponding to CD is corresponding to the content, and the processing ends. In step S82, when it is judged that there are no more than two candidates, the program proceeds to step S78, and the recording program 113 matches the information of the corresponding CD received by the server corresponding to the CDDB with the content, and the processing ends. In step S72, when it is judged that the information of the corresponding CD is recorded in the designated index, the process proceeds to step S85, the recording program 113 reads the recorded information of the corresponding CD, and proceeds to step S78, so that the read information of the corresponding CD Corresponds to the content, and processing ends. As described above, the recording program 1 1 3 obtains the information corresponding to CD from one of the two or more servers with different retrieval procedures. In addition, the recording program 1 1 3 used the information recorded in the past to obtain information corresponding to CD, and used the recorded information. Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 49, the recording processing of the data in the display data file 1 82 by the display operation instruction program 1 12 will be described. In step S91, the display operation instruction program 112 generates a note on the master table of the display data file 182. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ---------- ----------- Order ------ I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) -59- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 Λ7 --- B7 V. Description of Invention (57). In step S92, the display operation instruction program 112 reads the types of data recorded in the display data file 182. In step S93, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 determines whether the type of the data read in step S92 is the type of the data recorded in the master table of the display data file 1 82, and the type of the data read out is determined as the record. In the case of the type of the data of the main table, the process proceeds to step S94, and the item record data of the type of the corresponding data recorded in the main table proceeds to step S95. In step S95, the display operation instruction program 112 determines whether to record all the data. In the case where it is judged that all the data has not been recorded, it returns to step S91 and repeats the data recording process. -In step S95, the case where it is judged that all the data are recorded is ended. In step S93, if it is determined that the type of data read is not the type of data recorded in the main table, the process proceeds to step s 9 6 ′ to display the operation instruction program 112 to generate a record on the sub-table of the display data file 182. In step S97, the type of the item record data of the record of the sub-table generated by the operation instruction program 12 in step S96 is displayed. In step S 98, the operation of 'displaying 7K' refers to not recording the item record data of the record of the sub-table produced in step S96, and proceeding to step S95, to determine whether to record all the data. In this way, the display operation instruction program UI 2 can display the types of data specified by the main table records of the data file 1 82 and the types of data recorded in the sub table of the data file 1 82 and its data (recorded in the main table Other types of information). This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 x 297 public love) ------------- ^ -------- ^ -------- -Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -60- 501058 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (58) Next, refer to the flowchart illustration in Figure 50 and display The reading operation of the operation instruction program U2 is performed by displaying the data in the data file 82. In step S01, the display operation instruction program 1 12 obtains the content ID or package ID corresponding to the content to be read. In step s 102, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 displays the type of the data read out. In step S 103, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 determines whether the type of the read data obtained in step S 102 is the type of the data recorded in the display data file of the master table 82, and is judged as a record In the case of the type of data of the master table, the process proceeds to step S104, and the record read out by the master table of the display data file 182 and the content ID or package ID is the same. In step S105, the display operation instruction program 1 12 is read out from the record read out in the processing of step S 104, and the data corresponding to the type of the readout data recorded with the designated item is recorded, and the processing is finished. In step S 103, when it is determined that the data is not recorded in the main table and the read data is not recorded in the sub table, the process proceeds to step S 06, and the display operation instruction program 1 12 is displayed by Record of the sub-table reading of the data file 1 82 and the content ID or package ID. In step S107, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 determines whether the type of the data of the recorded item read out by the processing read out in step S 1 06 is consistent with the type of the read-out data. In the case where the type of the data of the recorded item does not agree with the type of the data read out, return to step S 06 and repeat the read-out processing of the record from the sub-table. In step S 1 07, in the case where the type of the data of the item which is judged to be stored in the read-out record is consistent with the type of the read-out data ', proceed to the step. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297mm) ---------- I--install --------- order ------ I line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)- 61-Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 _ B7 V. Description of the Invention (59) S1 08, the display operation instruction program 112 reads the data from the record, and the processing is completed. So, the display operation instruction program Η 2 The display data file i 82 reads out the specified type of data. Next, for example, referring to the flow description button 437 of FIG. 51, when the button 437 is clicked, the process is performed by displaying the filter set of the operation instruction program 1 12. In step S 1 11, the operation instruction program 11 2 is selected to be stored in the filtering data file 1 8 1 of the initial filtering data 55 1. For example, the filtering data 551-in step S 1 1 2, the operation instruction program is displayed 11 2 Based on the information stored in the display data file 1 82] 4 2 ~ 1! And the resume_data or one of them stored in the resume data file 184 and the selected filter data 551 as the basis, calculate the content of the content. Weight. In step S 1 1 3, the display operation instruction program 1 12 selects the content belonging to the filtering package corresponding to the selected filtering data 551 based on the content of the content calculated in step S 11 2. In step S 1 1 4, the display operation instruction program 11 2 registers the content selected in step S 11 3 in the filter kit corresponding to the selected filter data 55 1. That is, the display operation instruction program 11 2 stores the content ID corresponding to the selected content in the display data 291 for the package corresponding to the filter kit corresponding to the selected filter data 55 1. In step S 1 1 5, the operation instruction program 11 2 is displayed to determine whether or not the filtering content corresponding to all the filtering data 55 1 stored in the filtering data file 1 8 1 is registered, and it is judged to correspond to all the filtering data. 55 The size of paper over 1 applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ------------- installation -------- order ---- ----- line (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -62- Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 __ _ B7 V. Description of the invention (60) In the case, proceed to step s 1 07, select the stored data and filter the data 5 1 under the filter file 1 8 1 and return to step S 11 2 to repeat the content registration process. In step S 1 1 5, in the case where it is judged that the contents of the filter suite corresponding to all the filter data 55 1 are registered, the processing is ended. In this way, the display operation instruction program 1 12 selects the content based on the data stored in the display data file 182 and the history data stored in the history data file 184, or one of them, and the selected filtering data 551. The selected content is registered in the filter kit. The receiver's reference is made to the flow chart of FIG. 52. For example, when the operation instruction window is displayed, when the display area 48 is displayed, the display is completed 1 | the instruction program 1 12 and the content management program — 1 1 1 are executed for checkout or check-in. In step S 1 21, the display operation instruction program 1 12 reads out the number of times that the corresponding content can be checked out from the display data file 1 82. In step s 1 1 2, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 displays the number of billable times read out in step S 1 2 1. In step S 1 23, the operation instruction program 11 2 is displayed to determine whether the button 49 1 for setting the checkout or the button 492 for setting the check-in is selected, and the button 49 1 for setting the check-out or the button 492 for setting the check-in is selected. In the case of clicking, proceed to step S1 24, and set up the checkout corresponding to the content of the selected song title in area 352, or the report corresponding to the content of the selected song title in area 481. In step S125, the display operation instruction program 112 updates the display corresponding to the checkout setting corresponding to the content of the song title selected in area 352 performed in step S124, or the report setting corresponding to the content of the song title selected in area 481. The content of the data file 182 shows the number of bills that can be settled with the display data 221. The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) --II I — — — — — — — — 1 IIIIII Order — — — — — — — — — (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -63- 501058 A7

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明（61 ) 到步驟S 1 2 1，重複處理。 於步驟S123中，在被判斷爲設定結帳之按鈕491以及 設定報到之按鈕492都未被點選之情形，進入步驟si26， 顯示操作指示程式1 12判斷使實行報到或結帳之按鈕484是 否被點選。 於步驟S126中，在判斷按鈕484被點選之情形，進入 步驟S 1 2 7 ’顯示操作指示程式π 2對應內容之結帳或內容 之報到之設定，使內容管理程式1 1 1之報到/結帳管理程 式1 32實行結帳、或報到。報到/結帳管理程式1 32以被儲 存在利用條件檔1 62之利用條件之資料爲基礎，每一內容 地判斷是否可以實行結帳、或報到，在被判斷爲可以實行 結帳、或報到之情形，實行結帳、或報到。 在被判斷爲不能實行結帳、或報到之情形，報到/結 帳管理程式1 32不實行結帳、或報到。 於步驟S 1 28中，顯示操作指示程式11 2對應內容之結 帳、或內容之報到之實行，使內容管理程式111之報到/ 結帳管理程式1 3 2更新被儲存在內容資料庫1 1 4之利用條件 檔1 62 (對應被結帳、或報到之內容）之利用條件之資料 之可以結帳次數。 於步驟S 1 29中，顯示操作指示程式11 2使報到/結帳 管理程式1 32由被儲存在對應被結帳或報到之內容之利用 條件檔1 62之利用條件之資料讀出可以結帳次數。 於步驟S 1 30中，顯示操作指示程式11 2更新被儲存在 履歷資料檔184之履歷資料之同時，以在步驟S129之處理 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ---------I I I I ---I-----^ . I-----I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -64 - 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（62 ) 讀出之可以結帳次數爲基礎，更新顯示資料檔1 8 2之內容 用顯示資料22 1，回到步驟S 1 2 1，重複處理。 (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) 於步驟S 1 2 6中，在被判斷ί女鈕4 8 4未被點選之情形， 不實行結帳或報到之故，回到步驟S 1 2 1，重複處理。 如此，顯示操作指示程式11 2對應結帳或報到之設定 ，更新顯示之同時，以結帳或報到之設定爲基礎，使內容 管理程式1 1 1實行結帳或報到。 接著，參考圖47之流程說明指定之圖像被拖曳於區域 348時，藉由顯示操作指示程式112被實行之圖像之貼上之 處理。於步驟S 1 5 1中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2判斷套件是 否被選擇，在被判斷i #被選擇之情形，進入步驟S 1 5 2， ' 將被拖曳之圖像轉換爲指定之尺寸，轉換方式、減少顏色 〇 於步驟S153中，顯示操作指示程式112將在步驟S152 之處理轉換被減少顏色之圖像儲存在圖像檔1 83。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 於步驟S 1 54中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2判斷內容是否 被選擇’在判斷內容未被選擇之情形，進入步驟S155，使 圖像檔1 83與被選擇之套件相關連（即，使被記錄之圖像 檔1 8 3之名稱當成顯示對應套件之套件用顯示資料2 1 1、套 件用顯示資料251、或套件用顯示資料291之其一之圖像檔 名之資料而記錄），處理終了。 於步驟S 1 54中，在被判斷內容被選擇之情形，進入步 驟S 156，顯示操作指示程式丨12使圖像檔183與被選擇之 內容相關連（即，使被記錄之圖像檔1 83之名稱當成顯示 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公髮） -65- 501058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明（63 ) 對應內谷之內谷用顯不資料221之圖像槍而記錄），處理 終了。 於步驟S 1 5 1中，在被判斷套件未被選擇之情形，沒有 使圖像賦予對應之對象之故，進入步驟S157，顯示操作指 示程式1 1 2顯示指定之錯誤信息，處理終了。 如此’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2可以將被拖曳之圖像貼 於套件或內容（使圖像與套件或內容相關連）。 接著，參考圖54之流程說明藉由顯示操作指示程式 112被貫f了之圖像之顯不處理。於步驟S181中，顯示操作 指示程式1 1 2判斷內容是否被再生，在被判斷爲內容不被 再生之情習’進入步驟S 1 8 2，判斷套件是否被選擇。 — 於步驟S 1 82中，在被判斷套件未被選擇之情形，進入 步驟S183，顯示操作指示程式112於區域348顯示預先決 定之圖像（例如，顯示顯示操作指示程式丨丨2之提供者之 圖像），回到步驟S 1 8 1，重複顯示之處理。 於步驟S 1 82中’在被判斷套件被選擇之情形，進入步 驟S 1 84，顯示操作指示程式11 2判斷內容是否被選擇。 於步驟S 1 84中，在被判斷內容未被選擇之情形，進入 步驟S 1 85，顯示操作指示程式1丨2將被與被選擇之套件賦 予關連之圖像顯示於區域348 (參考顯示被儲存在套件用 顯不貝料211之圖像檔名之資料’讀出被儲存在指定之圖 像檔183-1至183-K之其一之圖像資料，將對應該圖像資料 之圖像顯示於區域348 )，回到步驟S 1 8 1，重複顯示之處 理。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） --------------· I I-----^ · I--II--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -66 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 __ B7 五、發明說明（64 ) 於步驟S 1 84中，在被判斷內容被選擇之情形，進入步 驟S 1 86，顯示操作指示程式11 2判斷有否與被選擇之內容 被賦予關連之圖像。 於步驟S186中，在被判斷有與被選擇之內容被賦予關 連之圖像之情形，進入步驟S 1 87，顯示操作指示程式Π 2 使與被選擇之內容被賦予關連之圖像顯示於區域348 (參 考顯示被儲存在對應被選擇之內容之內容用顯示資料22 1 之圖像檔明知資料，讀出被儲存在指定之圖像檔1 83-1至 183-K之其一之圖像資料，將對應該圖像資料之圖像顯示於 區域348 )，回到步驟S181，重複顯示之處理。 於步驟S 1 86中,被判斷爲沒有與被選擇之內容被賦 _ 予關連之圖像之情形，進入步驟S 1 88，顯示操作指示程式 1 1 2將與被選擇之內容所屬之套件被賦予關連之圖像顯示於 區域348，回到步驟S181，重複顯示之處理。 於步驟S 1 8 1中，在被判斷內容被再生之情形，進入步 驟S 1 89，顯示操作指示程式11 2判斷對應各頻率頻帶之聲 音之信號位準之顯示是否被設定，在被判斷爲對應各頻率 頻帶之聲音之信號位準之顯示被設定之情形，進入步驟 S1 90，於區域34 8顯示對應各頻率頻帶之聲音之信號位準 ，回到步驟S 1 8 1，重複顯示之處理。 於步驟S 1 89中，在被判斷爲對應各頻率頻帶之聲音之 信號位準之顯示未被設定之情形，進入步驟S 1 9 1，顯示操 作指示程式112於區域348顯示聲音之波形（對應輸出之聲 音之時間的經過之信號位準），回到步驟S 1 8 1，重複顯示 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----------I I I ·1!111 I I ' — — IIIIII (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) -67- 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（65 ) 之處理。 如此，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2對應套件或內容之選擇 狀態，或內容之再生，使於區域348顯示：與套件被賦予 關連之圖像、與內容被賦予關連之圖像、對應各頻率頻帶 之聲音之信號位準、或輸出之聲音之波形之其一。 接著，參考圖55之流程圖說明藉由內容管理程式111 之屬於同一原始套件之內容之結合處理。於步驟S221中， 內容管理程式111由內容資料庫114讀出對應結合之第1內 容之利用條件檔162。於步驟S222中，內容管理程式1 1 1 判定對應第1內容之可以結帳次數是否與對應第1內容之 可以結帳最大次數H，在被判定可以結帳次數與可以結 ―帳最大次數相等之情形，進入步驟S223，判定於第1內容 是否被設定再生期限或再生次數。 於步驟S223中，在被判定於第1內容未被設定再生期 限或再生次數之情形，進入步驟S224，內容管理程式1 1 1 由內容資料庫11 4讀出對應結合之第2內容之利用條件檔 162。於步驟S225中，內容管理程式111判定對應第2內容 之可以結帳次數是否與對應第2內容之可以結帳最大次數 相等，在被判定可以結帳次數與可以結帳最大次數相等之 情形，進入步驟S226，判定於第2內容是否被設定再生期 限或再生次數。 於步驟S226中，在被判定於第2內容未被設定再生期 限或再生次數之情形，進入步驟S227，內容管理程式111 判定第1內容之可以結帳最大次數是否與第2內容之可以 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） •------------I -裝·丨 I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · 線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 -68 - 501058 Λ7 ______Β7__ 五、發明說明（66 ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 結帳最大次數相等，在被判定第1內容之可以結帳最大次 數與第2內容之可以結帳最大次數相等之情形，進入步驟 S228。 於步驟S228中，內容管理程式111由內容資料庫114 之個別對應之內容檔1 6 1讀出第1內容與第2內容，結合 第1內容與第2內容，記錄之。即，內容管理程式1 Π於. 內容資料庫114使產生新的內容檔161。儲存結合之內容。 於步驟S 2 2 9中，顯示操作指示程式11 2產生被結合之 內容之名稱。顯示操作指示程式1 1 2於內容資料庫1 1 4使產 生之內容之名稱儲存在顯示資料檔182。於步驟S230中， 內容管理程式111>於再''蓉資料庫u 4使被結合之內容之可以 —結帳最大次數以及可以結帳次數設定爲與第1內容相同之 値地，更新利用條件檔1 62，處理終了。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 於步驟S222中，在被判定對應第1內容之可以結帳次 數與對應第1內容之可以結帳最大次數不等之情形，第1 內容無法被結合之故，處理終了。於步驟S 2 2 3中，在被判 定於第1內容被設定再生期限或再生次數之情形，第1內 容無法被結合之故，處理終了。 於步驟S225中，在被判定對應第2內容之可以結帳次 數與對應第2內容之可以結帳最大次數不等之情形，第2內 容無法被結合之故，處理終了。於步驟S226中，在被判定 方々桌2內容被設定再生期限或再生次數之情形，第2內容無 法被結合之故，處理終了。 於步驟S227中，在被判定第1內容之可以結帳最大次 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格⑵“挪公髮） -- -69- 501058 A7 ________ B7 五、發明說明（67 ) 數與第2內容之可以結帳最大次數不等之情形，第1內容 與第2內容無法被結合之故，處理終了。 (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) 如此’個人電腦1可以結合：屬於同一原始套件、可 以結帳最大次數相等、未被結帳、再生期限或再生次數未 被設定、被記錄於內容資料庫1 1 4之內容。結合未被結帳 '再生期限或再生次數未被設定之內容之故，對應內容之 可以結帳次數、再生期限、或再生次數不會被變更。因此 ’不損及使用者之權力，可以防止不當增加可以結帳之次 數、或不當變更再生期限、或再生次數。 又’代替可以結帳最大次數之判定、以及再生期限或 再生次數是否被設~定1£^判定，進行內容所屬之套件之來源 _ 是否爲CD(由CD記錄之內容，可以結帳最大次數爲一定（ 3次），再生期限或再生次數未被設定）之判定，在被判定 內容所屬之套件之來源爲CD之情形，也可以結合內容。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 接著，參考圖56之流程圖說明藉由內容管理程式111 之內容之分割處理。於步驟S241中，內容管理程式1 1 1取 得分割內容之位置（例如，開始演奏起之經過時間、或於 現在時間點被再生之、被包含於該內容之資料被配置之內 容上之位置）。於步驟S242中，內容管理程式111由內容 資料庫11 4讀出對應分割之內容之利用條件檔1 62。 於步驟S243中，內容管理程式1 11判定對應內容之可 以結帳次數是否與對應內容之可以結帳最大次數相等，在 被判定可以結帳次數與可以結帳最大次數相等之情形，進 入步驟S244，判定於內容是否被設定再生期限或再生次數 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -70- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（68 ) 〇 於步驟S244中，在被判定於內容未被設定再生期限或 再生次數之情形，進入步驟S245，內容管理程式1 1 1由內 容資料庫1 14之對應內容檔161讀出內容，由在步驟S241 之處理取得之位置分割內容，記錄之。即，內容管理程式 1 1 1於內容資料庫1 1 4使產生新的內容檔1 6 1，儲存分割之 內容。 於步驟S246中，顯示操作指示程式1 12產生被分割之 內容之名稱。顯示操作指示程式11 2於內容資料庫1 1 4使產 生之內容之名稱儲存在顯示資料檔182。於步驟S247中， 內容管理程式11 1於內容資料庫11 4使被分割之內容之可以 ' 結帳最大次數以及可以結帳次數設定爲與原來之內容相同 之値地，更新利用條件檔1 62，處理終了。 於步驟S243中，在被判定可以結帳次數與可以結帳最 大次數不等之情形，內容無法分割之故，處理終了。於步 驟S244中，在被判定於內容被設定再生期限或再生次數之 情形，內容無法被分割之故，處理終了。 如此，個人電腦1可以分割：未被結帳、再生期限或 再生次數未被設定、被記錄於內容資料庫丨14之內容。分 割未被結帳、再生期限或再生次數未被設定之內容之故， 對應內谷之可以結帳次數、再生期限、或再生次數不會被 變更。因此’不損及使用者之權力，可以防止不當增加可 以結帳之次數、或不當變更再生期限、或再生次數。 又’代替再生期限或再生次數是否被設定之判定，進 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） -------------I--------I ------- (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) -71 - 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 --- B7 五、發明說明（69 ) 行內容所屬之套件之來源是否爲CD(再生期限或再生次數未 被設定）之判定，在被判定內容所屬之套件之來源爲CD之 情形，也可以分割內容。 接著，參考圖57之流程圖說明可攜式裝置6_丨被接續 於USB連接埠23-1時之個人電腦1之處理。於步驟S261中 ’啓動程式1 1 7由個人電腦1-1之作業系統接收裝置被接續 於USB連接埠23-1之旨意之通知時，由驅動器1 16-1取得 被接續於USB連接埠23-1之機器之機器ID。 於步驟S262中，啓動程式117判定可攜式裝置6-1是否 被接續，在被判定可攜式裝置6-1未被接續之情形，回到步 驟S 26 1，至可攜式裝6-1被接續爲止，重複可攜式裝置 -6-1是否被接續之判定處理。 於步驟S262中，在被判定可攜式裝置6-1被接續之情 形，進入步驟S263，啓動程式1 17判定顯示操作指示程式 1 1 2是否被啓動。於步驟S263中，在被判定顯示操作指示 程式112未被啓動之情形，進入步驟S264，啓動程式117 啓動顯示操作指示程式112，進入步驟S265。 於步驟S263中，在被判定顯示操作指示程式112被啓 動之情形，沒有必要啓動顯示操作指示程式1 1 2之故，步 驟S264被跳過，進入步驟S265。 於步驟S265中，顯示操作指示程式112顯示指定之對 話框，顯示可攜式裝置6-1被接續之旨意。 於步驟S266中，顯示操作指示程式112由內容管理程 式1 1 1讀取對應被記錄於可攜式裝置6-1之內容之曲名。於 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------^--------^ —-------線 <請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -72- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 _ B7 五、發明說明（70 ) 步驟S267中，顯示操作指示程式112於顯示操作指示程式 112顯示之視窗中，使顯示區域481。於步驟S268中，顯示 操作指示程式1 1 2於區域48 1顯示對應被記錄於可攜式裝置 6-1之內容之曲名。 於步驟S269中，顯示操作指示程式1 1 2判定在可攜式 裝置6-1被接續時，自動地結帳之旨意是否被設定於顯示操 作指示程式1 1 2，在被判定可攜式裝置6-1被接續時，自動 地結帳之旨意被設定之情形，進入步驟S270，報到被記憶 於可攜式裝置6-1之內容（限定於由個人電腦1 -1被結帳之 內容）。 於步驟S27 1中，'賴_示操作指示程式112以被儲存在過 - 濾資料檔1 8 1之預先被設定之過濾資料55 1爲基礎，產生過 濾套件。於步驟S272中，顯示操作指示程式112由被產生 之過濾套件選擇結帳之內容（例如，最初之1 0個之內容） 〇 於步驟S273中，顯示操作指示程式112使被選擇之內 容於可攜式裝置6-1結帳。於步驟S274中，顯示操作指示 程式1 1 2對應於內容之結帳地，更新區域48 1之顯示，處理 終了。 於步驟S269中，在被判定可攜式裝置6-1被接續時， 自動地結帳之旨意未被設定之情形，沒有必要做結帳之處 理之故，步驟S270至步驟S274之處理被跳過，處理終了。 如此，個人電腦1 -1在可攜式裝置6-1被接續時，.啓動 顯示操作指示程式11 2，可以顯示對應被記憶於可攜式裝 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I------------ --------訂-------- {請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -73· 501058 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 五、發明說明（71 ) 置6-1之內容之曲名。因此’不需要啓動顯示操作指示程式 U 2等之操作，使用者可以迅速將希望之內容於可攜式裝置 6 -1結帳。 又’在可攜式裝置6-1被接續之情形，在顯示操作指示 程式1 1 2被設定於可攜式裝置6 · 1被接續時，自動地結帳之 旨意時，個人電腦1 -1可以報到被記億於可攜式裝置6-1之 之內容之同時’可以結帳指定之內容。 可攜式裝置6-3被接續於個人電腦1-丨之情形，也實行 同樣之處理之故，其說明省略。 又’於步驟S269中，雖然說明顯示操作指示程式丨12 判定在可攜式裝寶6H接續時，自動地結帳之旨意是否被 設定於顯示操作指示程式1 1 2，但是也可以於可攜式裝置 6-1設定在可攜式裝置6-1被接續時，自動地被結帳之旨意 ’顯示操作指示程式1 1 2以可攜式裝置6-1之設定爲基礎而 進行判定。 於此情形，例如，可攜式裝置6-1於內藏之記憶體之預 先決定之位址記憶顯示是否自動地被結帳之旗標。顯示操 作指示程式1 1 2在可攜式裝置6-1被接續時，讀出被記憶在 被內藏於可攜式裝置6-1之記憶體之預先決定之位址之顯示 是否自動地被結帳之旗標，以該旗標爲基礎，進行自動地 結帳之旨意是否被設定之判定。 進而，可攜式裝置6-1在可以裝置、拆下記憶體之情形 ，也可以在可以裝置、拆下之記憶體之預先決定之位址記 億顯示是否自動地被結帳之旗標。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ^ · I I-----^-------I (請先閱讀背面之注音〕事項再填寫本頁) -74- 501058 A7 ________ B7 五、發明說明（72 ) (請先閱讀背面之注音？事項再填寫本頁) 又’於步驟S27 1中，顯示操作指示程式丨丨2雖以被儲 存在過濾資料檔1 8 1之預先被設定之過濾資料5 5 1爲基礎， 產生過濾套件而做說明，但是，可攜式裝置6-1記憶過濾資 料55 1 ’顯示操作指示程式丨丨2以可攜式裝置6_丨記憶之過 濾資料5 5 1爲基礎，產生過濾套件亦可。 於此情形，例如，可攜式裝置6-1於內藏之記憶體之預 先決定之位址記憶過濾資料55 1。顯示操作指示程式1 1 2在 可攜式裝置6-1被接續時，讀出被記憶在被內藏於可攜式裝 置6-1之記憶體之預先決定之位址之過濾資料55 1，以該過 爐資料5 5 1爲基礎，產生過爐套件。 進而，可攜吏裝H1在可以裝置、拆下記憶體之情形 -，也可以在能夠裝置、拆下之記憶體之預先決定之位址記 憶過濾資料551。 又，顯示操作指示程式11 2也可以不以過濾資料55 1爲 基礎，隨機選擇內容，於內容管理程式111結帳被選擇之 內容。 又，顯示操作指示程式112也可以藉由使用者之設定 而再生內容時，使於區域348顯示表示現在輸出之聲音之 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 位準之圖像。 又，個人電腦1壓縮內容之方式例如雖就ATRAC3而說 明，但是不限定於ATRAC3，也可以爲MP3(Moving Picture Experts Group 2 Audio Layer 3)、TwinQV(商標）、或 AAC(MPEG2 ance Audio Coding)等之其一之壓縮方式。 又，個人電腦1加密內容之方式雖就例如DES而說明 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -75- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 ___ B7 五、發明說明（73 ) ’但是不限定於DES，也可以爲：IDEA(International Data Encription Algorithm)、公開鍵加密方式之RAS、或橢圓加 密等之其一之加密方式。 又，內容管理程式1 1 1例如也可以作成在個人電腦1之 內部獨立設置，在由個人電腦1無法直接讀出內容管理程 式111本身之硬體上實行。又，實行內容管理程式111之硬 體也可以使之具有耐阻尼性。 上述之一連串之處理也可以藉由硬體而使之實行，也 可以藉由軟體而使之實行。在藉由軟體使實行一連串之處 理之情形，構成該軟體之程式可以由程式收容媒體被安裝 在被組裝於專用之/硬11^之電腦、或藉由安裝各種之程式， - 可以實行各種之機能之例如泛用之個人電腦等。 被安裝於電腦，儲存藉由電腦成爲可以實行之狀態之 程式之程式收容媒體如圖2或圖3所示般地，係由：磁碟 41或91(包含軟碟）、光碟42或92(包含00-ROM(Compact Disc-Read Only Memory) ' DVD(Digital Cersatile Disc))、光磁碟 43 或 93 (包含 MD(Mini-Disc)) 、或藉由半導體記憶體44或94等形成之套件媒體、或程序 一時或永久被儲存之R0M12或62、或HDD21或71等所構 成。對程式收容媒體之程式之收容因應需要，透過通信部 25或73等之介面，利用區域網路或網際網路等之網路2、 數位衛星廣播之有線或無線之通信媒體而進行。 又，於本.細說明書中，記述被儲存在程式收容媒體 之程式之步驟當然可以沿著被記載之順序，時間序列地被 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------^--------^--------•線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -76- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 -____ B7 五、發明說明（74 ) 進行處理.，但是不一定時間序列地被處理，也包含並列或 個別地被實行之處理。 又，於本詳細說明書中，所謂系統係顯示藉由複數之 裝置所構成之裝置全體者。 【發明之效果】 如依據申請專利範圍第1項記載之資訊處理裝置、申 請專利範圍第2項記載之資訊處理方法、以及申請專利範 圍第3項記載之程式收容媒體中，第1內容是否被結帳被 判定，第2內容是否被結帳被判定，在被判定第1內容與 第2內容皆未被結帳之情形，第1內容與第2內容被結合 之故，不會損及使用者之權力地，又，可以一面防止不當 之內容之利用，一面結合內容。 如依據申請專利範圍第4項記載之資訊處理裝置、申 請專利範圍第5項記載之資訊處理方法、以及申請專利範 圍第6項記載之程式收容媒體中，內容是否被結帳被判定 ，在被判定內容未被結帳之情形，內容被分割之故，不會 損及使用者之權力地，又，可以一面防止不當之內容之利 用，一面分割內容。 【圖面之簡單說明】 圖1係顯示本發明之音樂資料管理系統之一實施形態 圖。 — 圖2係說明個人電腦1之構成圖， 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公爱） -------------^--------^--I ------^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -77- B7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 i x發明說明（75 ) 圖3係說明EMD登錄伺服器3之構成圖。 圖4係說明個人電腦1之機能之構成之方塊圖。 圖5係顯示利用條件之資料之例圖。 圖6係說明屬於顯示資料檔1 82之原始套件用顯示資 ^4 201與內容檔丨6丨_1至16i_n之關係例之圖。 圖7係顯示顯示資料檔1 82之構成例圖。 圖8係說明我的套件用顯示資料24 1與內容檔1 6 1 -1至 161·Ν之關係圖。 圖9係說明過濾套件用顯示資料28 1與內容檔1 6 1 -1至 161-N之關係圖。 圖1 〇係說明e mU登錄之處理圖。 圖1 1係顯示實行登錄之處理用之畫面之例圖。 圖1 2係顯示EMD選擇程式1 3 1使之顯示之畫面之例圖 〇 圖1 3係顯示購入用應用程式1 5 1使之顯示之畫面之例 圖。 圖1 4係顯示購入用驅動器1 4 1使之顯示之畫面之例圖 〇 圖1 5係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖16係說明錄音程式113使顯示於顯示器20之視窗之 例圖。 圖17係顯示設定WWW5-1或5-2之其之之選擇之屬性 對話框圖。一 圖18係顯示設定WWW5-1或5-2之其之之選擇之屬性 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） I — I — I — — — — — — — — · I I I I I I I ^ « — — — — — III (請先閱讀背面之注咅？事項再填寫本頁) -78- 五、發明說明（76 ^寸話框圖。 圖1 9係說明錄音程式11 3使顯示於顯示器2〇之視窗之 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 例圖 ® 20係說明錄音程式1 1 3使顯示於顯示器20之視窗之 例圖。 圖2 1係說明錄音程式1 1 3使顯示於顯示器20之對話框 之例圖。 圖22係說明錄音程式η 3使顯示於顯示器2〇之對話框 之例圖。 Η 23係說明錄音程式u 3使顯示於顯示器2〇之對話框 之例圖。 …- 圖24係說明錄音程式u3使顯示於顯示器2〇之視窗之 例圖 圖25係說明錄音程式u 3使顯示於顯示器2〇之視窗之 例圖。 圖26係說明錄音程式1丨3使顯示於顯示器20之對話框 461之例圖。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖27係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖2 8係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖29係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖3 0係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖3 1係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖32係顯-示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖33係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -79- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A? ^-----— B7___ 31、發明說明（77 ) 圖34係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖35係說明過濾套件之產生之處理圖。 圖3 6係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖37係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖3 8係顯不顯不操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖3 9係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖40係顯不顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖4 1係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖42係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖4 3係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖44係顯示顧宗111乍指示視窗之例圖。 ' 圖45係顯示顯示操作指示視窗之例圖。 圖46係說明登錄處理之流程圖。 圖47係說明由CD來之錄音處理之流程圖。 圖48係說明對應CD之資訊之取得處理之流程圖。 圖49係說明對顯示資料檔1 82之資料之記錄處理之流 程圖。 圖50係說明由顯示資料檔1 82來之資料之讀出處理之 流程圖。 圖5 1係說明過濾套件之產生處理之流程圖。 圖52係說明結帳或報到處理之流程圖。 圖53係說明圖像之貼上處理之流程圖。 圖54係說J月圖像之顯示處理之流程圖。 圖55係說明內容之結合處理之流程圖。 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） ----------------I----^ ·11!1111 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) -80- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 501058 A7 B7_ 五、發明說明（78 ) 圖56孫說明內容之分割處理之流程圖。 圖57係說明可攜式裝置6-1被接續時之處理之流程圖 〇 【標號之說明】 1-1、1-2 :個人電腦， 2 :網路， 3 : EMD登錄伺服器， 6-1至6-4 :可攜式裝置， 11 ： CPU ， 12 ·· ROM， ' 13 : RAM， 21 ： HDD， 41 :磁碟， 42 :光碟， 4 3 :光磁碟， 44 :半導體記憶體， 61 : CPU ， 62 ： ROM， 63 : RAM， 71 ： HDD， 91 ··磁碟， 92 :光碟，一 9 3 :光磁碟， 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210>< 297公釐) n I— n l n n n n n n I I n n n n n n n 一°JI n ϋ n n n n n I (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 81 - 501058 A7 B7 五、發明說明（79 4 9 體 憶 記 導 半 式 ， 程 、， 式示 ，式 程指，庫程 理作式料擇 管操程資選 容示音容 內顯錄內 D Μ 到密縮密用名證碼 報加壓加利署認解 式，， .， 程式式 I式 理程程 植， 管換換 ，換式 長專專，專呈 47 ef-Gri iua i - 1/ 結式式式件理 \ 方方程條管 式式 程程Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (61) Go to step S 1 2 and repeat the process. In step S123, when it is judged that the button 491 for setting the checkout and the button 492 for setting the check-in are not selected, the process proceeds to step si26, and the operation instruction program 1 12 is displayed to determine whether the button 484 for performing the check-in or checkout is performed. Clicked. In step S126, if the judgment button 484 is clicked, the process proceeds to step S 1 2 7 'Display the operation instruction program π 2 corresponding to the checkout of the content or the setting of the content registration, so that the content management program 1 1 1 reports to / The checkout management program 1 32 performs checkout or registration. The check-in / check-out management program 1 32 is based on the data of the use conditions stored in the use condition file 1 62, and judges whether the check-out or check-in can be performed for each content. In the case of checkout, or check-in. In the case where it is judged that the checkout or check-in cannot be performed, the check-in / check-out management program 1 32 does not perform the check-out or check-in. In step S 1 28, the display of the operation instruction program 11 2 corresponding to the checkout of the content, or the execution of the check-in of the content is displayed, so that the check-in / check-out management program of the content management program 111 1 3 2 is updated and stored in the content database 1 1 The use condition file of 4 (the corresponding conditions of the account being settled or reported) can be settled the number of times. In step S 1 29, the operation instruction program 11 2 is displayed, and the check-in / check-out management program 1 32 is read out from the use condition data stored in the use condition file 1 62 corresponding to the content to be checked out or checked in. frequency. In step S 1 30, the operation instruction program 11 2 is displayed while updating the resume data stored in the resume data file 184, and the paper size is processed in step S129. The Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) is applied. %) --------- IIII --- I ----- ^. I ----- I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -64-501058 A7 B7 Five 2. Description of the invention (62) Based on the number of times that the account can be read out, update the content of the display data file 1 8 2 with the display data 22 1 and return to step S 1 2 1 to repeat the process. (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page.) In step S 1 2 6, if it is judged that the female button 4 8 4 is not selected, checkout or registration is not implemented. Go back Step S 1 2 1 is repeated. In this way, the display operation instruction program 11 2 corresponds to the checkout or check-in setting, and at the same time the display is updated, based on the checkout or check-in setting, the content management program 1 1 1 performs checkout or check-in. Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 47, when the designated image is dragged to the area 348, the process of pasting the image executed by the display operation instruction program 112 is explained. In step S 1 51, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed to determine whether the package is selected. In the case of being judged i # is selected, proceed to step S 1 5 2 'to convert the dragged image to the specified size. Conversion mode, color reduction. In step S153, the display operation instruction program 112 stores the image whose color reduction is processed in step S152 in the image file 183. Printed in step S 1 54 by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed to determine whether the content is selected. The selected package is related (that is, the name of the recorded image file 1 8 3 is used to display the package display data corresponding to the package 2 1 1, the package display data 251, or the package display data 291 Image file name and record), processing is complete. In step S 1 54, when it is judged that the selected content is selected, the process proceeds to step S 156, and the operation instruction program 丨 12 is displayed to associate the image file 183 with the selected content (that is, the recorded image file 1 The name of 83 is used as the indication that the size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). -65- 501058 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. The invention description (63) Corresponds to Inner Valley (Niuchiya recorded with the image gun of the display material 221), and the processing is finished. In step S 1 51, when it is judged that the kit is not selected, and the image is not assigned to the corresponding object, the process proceeds to step S157, and the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 displays the designated error message, and the processing ends. In this way, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 can paste the dragged image to the package or content (associate the image with the package or content). Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 54, the display of the image that has been executed by the display operation instruction program 112 will be described. In step S181, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 determines whether the content is reproduced, and if it is determined that the content is not reproduced, it proceeds to step S 1 8 2 to determine whether the package is selected. — In step S 1 82, if it is determined that the package is not selected, proceed to step S183, and the display operation instruction program 112 displays a predetermined image in the area 348 (for example, display the display operation instruction program 丨 2 provider Image), return to step S 1 81, and repeat the process of display. In step S 1 82, when the judged package is selected, the process proceeds to step S 1 84, and the operation instruction program 11 2 is displayed to determine whether the content is selected. In step S 1 84, if it is determined that the content is not selected, the process proceeds to step S 1 85, and the display operation instruction program 1 丨 2 displays the image associated with the selected package in the area 348 (reference display is The information of the image file name stored in the package display material 211 'reads out the image data stored in one of the specified image files 183-1 to 183-K, and will correspond to the image of the image data. The image is displayed in the area 348), and the process returns to step S 1 81, and the display processing is repeated. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -------------- · I I ----- ^ · I--II --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -66-Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 __ B7 V. Description of the invention (64) In step S 1 84, the judged content is selected In this case, the process proceeds to step S186, and the display operation instruction program 112 determines whether there is an image associated with the selected content. In step S186, when it is determined that there is an image related to the selected content, the process proceeds to step S187, and the display operation instruction program Π 2 displays the image related to the selected content in the area. 348 (Referring to display the image file know-how data stored in the content display data 22 1 corresponding to the selected content, and read out one of the images stored in the specified image file 1 83-1 to 183-K Data, the image corresponding to the image data is displayed in the area 348), and the process returns to step S181 to repeat the display processing. In step S 1 86, if it is judged that there is no image associated with the selected content, proceed to step S 1 88, and display the operation instruction program 1 1 2 with the package to which the selected content belongs. The related image is displayed in the area 348, and the process returns to step S181 to repeat the display processing. In step S 1 81, when it is judged that the content is reproduced, proceed to step S 1 89, and the display operation instruction program 11 2 judges whether the display of the signal level corresponding to the sound of each frequency band is set, and when it is judged as In the case where the display of the signal level of the sound corresponding to each frequency band is set, proceed to step S1 90, and display the signal level of the sound corresponding to each frequency band in area 34 8 and return to step S 1 8 1 to repeat the display processing . In step S 1 89, when it is determined that the display of the signal level of the sound corresponding to each frequency band is not set, proceed to step S 1 91, and the display operation instruction program 112 displays the sound waveform (corresponding to area 348). The signal level of the elapsed time of the output sound), go back to step S 1 8 1 and repeatedly display that the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -------- --III · 1! 111 II '— — IIIIII (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -67- 501058 A7 B7 V. Disposal of invention description (65). In this way, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 corresponds to the selection status of the package or content, or the reproduction of the content, so that the area 348 is displayed: the image associated with the package, the image associated with the content, and each frequency band. One of the signal level of the sound, or the waveform of the output sound. Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 55, the combination processing of the content belonging to the same original package by the content management program 111 will be described. In step S221, the content management program 111 reads out the use condition file 162 corresponding to the combined first content from the content database 114. In step S222, the content management program 1 1 1 determines whether the number of times that can be settled corresponding to the first content and the maximum number of times that can be settled corresponding to the first content H are determined. In this case, the process proceeds to step S223, and it is determined whether or not the reproduction period or the number of reproduction times is set in the first content. In step S223, if it is determined that the first content has not been set a reproduction period or the number of reproduction times, the process proceeds to step S224, and the content management program 1 1 1 reads out the use conditions of the corresponding combined second content from the content database 11 4 File 162. In step S225, the content management program 111 determines whether the number of times that can be checked out corresponding to the second content is equal to the maximum number of times that can be checked out corresponding to the second content. In the case where it is determined that the number of times that can be checked out is equal to the maximum number of times that can be checked out, The process proceeds to step S226, and it is determined whether or not a reproduction period or the number of times of reproduction is set for the second content. In step S226, if it is determined that the second content has not been set a reproduction period or the number of times of reproduction, the process proceeds to step S227, and the content management program 111 determines whether the maximum number of billable times of the first content is the same as that of the second content. Standards are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) • ------------ I -installation · 丨 I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -68-501058 Λ7 ______ Β7__ V. Description of the Invention (66) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The maximum number of checkouts is the same. If the maximum number of times that can be settled is equal to the maximum number of times that can be settled in the second content, the process proceeds to step S228. In step S228, the content management program 111 reads out the first content and the second content from the individual corresponding content files 161 of the content database 114, combines the first content and the second content, and records them. That is, the content management program 1 generates a new content file 161 in the content database 114. Store the combined content. In step S 2 2 9, the operation instruction program 11 2 generates the name of the combined content. The display operation instruction program 1 1 2 stores the name of the generated content in the display data file 182 in the content database 1 1 4. In step S230, the content management program 111 > Rong database u 4 enables the combined content-the maximum number of checkouts and the number of possible checkouts are set to the same place as the first content, and the use conditions are updated File 1 62, processing is complete. The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed in step S222. In the case where it is determined that the number of billable times corresponding to the first content is different from the maximum number of billable times corresponding to the first content, the first content cannot be combined. Therefore, the processing is over. In step S 2 2 3, when it is determined that the reproduction period or the number of reproduction times is set for the first content, the first content cannot be combined, and the processing is ended. In step S225, if it is determined that the number of billable times corresponding to the second content is different from the maximum number of billable times corresponding to the second content, the second content cannot be combined, and the processing ends. In step S226, in the case where it is determined that the content of the second party table 2 is set with a reproduction period or the number of reproductions, the second content cannot be combined, and the processing ends. In step S227, the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 specification ““ Nuo Gongfa ”is applied to the paper size that can be settled for the maximum number of times that the first content is determined. --- 69- 501058 A7 ________ B7 V. Description of the invention (67 ) If the number is different from the maximum number of times you can check out the second content, the first content and the second content can not be combined, the processing is completed. (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) so ' Personal computer 1 can be combined: belonging to the same original package, equal to the maximum number of checkouts, not checked out, the reproduction period or the number of reproduction times has not been set, and the content recorded in the content database 1 1 4. Combination of unchecked contents' The content of the replay period or number of replays has not been set, and the number of receivable bills, replay periods, or replay counts of the corresponding content will not be changed. Therefore, 'the user's rights are not impaired, and improper increase of the number of receivable bills can be prevented. The number of times, or improperly changing the reproduction period, or the number of reproductions. Also, 'instead of the determination of the maximum number of times that can be checked out, and whether the reproduction period or the number of reproductions is set to ~ 1 定The source of the package_ Whether the content is a CD (the content recorded by the CD, the maximum number of times that can be checked out is a certain number (3 times), the reproduction period or the number of reproduction times is not set), the source of the package to which the determined content belongs is In the case of CD, the content can also be combined. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Next, the content division process by the content management program 111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56. In step S241, the content management program 1 1 1 Obtain the position of the divided content (for example, the elapsed time from the start of performance or the position on the content where the data included in the content is reproduced at the current time point). In step S242, the content management program 111 The use condition file 1 62 corresponding to the divided content is read out from the content database 114. In step S243, the content management program 11 determines whether the number of times that the corresponding content can be checked out is equal to the maximum number of times that the corresponding content can be checked out. When it is determined that the number of times that can be settled is equal to the maximum number of times that can be settled, the process proceeds to step S244, and it is determined whether the content is set for a reproduction period Or the number of times of recycling This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) -70- Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (68) 〇 In step S244 In the case where it is determined that the content has not been set a reproduction period or number of reproductions, the process proceeds to step S245, and the content management program 1 1 1 reads the content from the corresponding content file 161 of the content database 1 14 and is obtained by the processing in step S241. Divide the content by location and record it. That is, the content management program 1 1 1 generates a new content file 16 1 from the content database 1 1 4 and stores the divided content. In step S246, the display operation instruction program 12 generates the name of the divided content. The display operation instruction program 11 2 stores the name of the generated content in the display data file 182 in the content database 1 1 4. In step S247, the content management program 11 1 and the content database 11 4 enable the divided content to be allowed to be checked. The maximum number of times of checkout and the number of times that can be checked out are set to the same place as the original content, and the utilization condition file 1 62 is updated. , Processing is over. In step S243, when it is judged that the number of times that can be settled is different from the maximum number of times that can be settled, the content cannot be divided, and the processing ends. In step S244, when it is determined that the content has been set for a reproduction period or the number of reproduction times, the content cannot be divided, and the processing ends. In this way, the personal computer 1 can be divided into: content that has not been settled, the reproduction period or the number of reproduction times has not been set, and is recorded in the content database 14. Due to the fact that the content is not settled, the renewal period or the number of replays is not set, the number of receivable bills, the renewal period, or the number of replays corresponding to Utani will not be changed. Therefore, 'does not undermine the rights of the user, and can prevent an improper increase of the number of times that can be checked out, or an improper change of the regeneration period, or the number of regenerations. Also 'instead of the determination of whether the regeneration period or the number of regenerations is set, the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ------------- I-- ------ I ------- (Please read the note on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -71-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 --- B7 V. Invention Explain (69) whether the source of the package to which the content belongs is a CD (the reproduction period or the number of reproduction times has not been set). In the case where the source of the package to which the content is determined is a CD, the content can also be divided. Next, the processing of the personal computer 1 when the portable device 6_ 丨 is connected to the USB port 23-1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57. In step S261, when the notification that the device is connected to the USB port 23-1 is received by the operating system of the personal computer 1-1, the driver 1 16-1 obtains the connection to the USB port 23 The machine ID of the machine at -1. In step S262, the startup program 117 determines whether the portable device 6-1 is connected. In the case where it is determined that the portable device 6-1 is not connected, it returns to step S 26 1 to the portable device 6-1. Until 1 is connected, the determination process of whether the portable device-6-1 is connected is repeated. In step S262, when it is determined that the portable device 6-1 is connected, the process proceeds to step S263, and the startup program 1 17 determines whether the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 is started. In step S263, when it is determined that the display operation instruction program 112 has not been started, the process proceeds to step S264, the startup program 117 starts the display operation instruction program 112, and the process proceeds to step S265. In step S263, when it is determined that the display operation instruction program 112 is activated, it is not necessary to start the display operation instruction program 1 12. Therefore, step S264 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S265. In step S265, the display operation instruction program 112 displays a designated dialog box showing the intention of the portable device 6-1 to be connected. In step S266, the display operation instruction program 112 reads the song title corresponding to the content recorded on the portable device 6-1 from the content management program 1 1 1. Applicable to China Paper Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) for this paper size ------------- ^ -------- ^ ------- -Line < Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -72- Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives 501058 A7 _ B7 V. Description of Invention (70) In step S267, the operation instruction program 112 is displayed on In the window displayed by the display operation instruction program 112, a display area 481 is set. In step S268, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed in area 48 1 to display the song title corresponding to the content recorded on the portable device 6-1. In step S269, the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 determines whether the purpose of automatic checkout is set to the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 when the portable device 6-1 is connected. If the purpose of automatic checkout is set when 6-1 is connected, proceed to step S270, and report to the content stored in the portable device 6-1 (limited to the content checked out by the personal computer 1 -1) . In step S27 1, the operation instruction program 112 based on the “lai_indication” 112 generates a filter set based on the preset filter data 55 1 stored in the filter data file 1 8 1. In step S272, the display operation instruction program 112 selects the checkout content (for example, the first 10 contents) from the generated filter kit. In step S273, the display operation instruction program 112 makes the selected content available. Checkout with a portable device 6-1. In step S274, the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is displayed corresponding to the checkout place of the content, and the display of the area 48 1 is updated, and the processing ends. In step S269, when it is determined that the portable device 6-1 is connected, the purpose of automatic checkout is not set, and it is not necessary to perform the checkout processing, and the processing of steps S270 to S274 is skipped However, the processing is over. In this way, when the personal computer 1 -1 is connected to the portable device 6-1, the display operation instruction program 11 2 is activated, which can display the correspondence to the size of the paper stored in the portable device. The Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification is applicable. (210 X 297 mm) I ------------ -------- Order -------- {Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -73 · 501058 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 V. Invention Description (71) Set the title of the content of 6-1. Therefore, it is not necessary to start the operation of the display operation instruction program U 2 and the like, and the user can quickly check out the desired content on the portable device 6 -1. In the case where the portable device 6-1 is connected, when the operation instruction program 1 1 2 is set to the portable device 6 · 1 when it is connected, the purpose of automatic checkout is personal computer 1 -1 You can report to the contents recorded in the portable device 6-1, and you can 'check out the specified contents. In the case where the portable device 6-3 is connected to the personal computer 1- 丨, the same processing is performed, and the description is omitted. In step S269, although the display operation instruction program 12 is explained, it is determined whether the purpose of automatic checkout is set to the display operation instruction program 1 1 2 when the portable device 6H is connected. When the portable device 6-1 is connected, the portable device 6-1 is set to automatically check out the purpose of the "display operation instruction program 1 1 2" based on the setting of the portable device 6-1 to determine. In this case, for example, the portable device 6-1 displays a flag in the built-in memory's pre-determined address memory to automatically checkout the flag. Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 When the portable device 6-1 is connected, read out whether the display stored in the predetermined address stored in the memory of the portable device 6-1 is automatically changed. The checkout flag is based on this flag to determine whether the purpose of automatic checkout is set. Furthermore, when the portable device 6-1 can be installed and removed, the portable device 6-1 can also display the flag of whether or not it is automatically checked out at a predetermined address of the memory that can be installed and removed. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ^ · I I ----- ^ ------- I (Please read the note on the back) before filling out this page ) -74- 501058 A7 ________ B7 V. Description of the invention (72) (Please read the note on the back? Matters and then fill out this page) Also, in step S27 1, the operation instruction program 丨 2 is stored in the filter The data file 1 8 1 is based on the pre-set filtering data 5 5 1 and a filtering kit is generated for explanation. However, the portable device 6-1 stores the filtering data 55 1 'display operation instruction program 丨 丨 2 is portable Device 6_ 丨 memory of filtering data 5 5 1 as the basis, you can also generate a filter kit. In this case, for example, the portable device 6-1 memorizes the filtering data 55 1 in a predetermined address of the built-in memory. Display operation instruction program 1 1 2 When the portable device 6-1 is connected, read out the filtering data 55 1 stored in a predetermined address stored in the memory of the portable device 6-1, Based on the furnace data 5 51, a furnace set is generated. Furthermore, the portable H1 can be used to store and remove memory when it can be installed and removed, and can also filter the data 551 at a predetermined address of the memory that can be installed and removed. In addition, the display operation instruction program 11 2 may not select the content randomly based on the filtering data 55 1 and settle the selected content in the content management program 111. In addition, the display operation instruction program 112 may display an image printed at the level of the consumer cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs in the area 348 when the content is reproduced by the user's setting. The method of compressing content on the personal computer 1 is, for example, ATRAC3, but it is not limited to ATRAC3, and may be MP3 (Moving Picture Experts Group 2 Audio Layer 3), TwinQV (trademark), or AAC (MPEG2 ance Audio Coding). One of the compression methods. In addition, although the way of encrypting the contents of the personal computer 1 is, for example, DES, this paper standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). B7 V. Description of the Invention (73) 'But it is not limited to DES. It may also be one of IDEA (International Data Encription Algorithm), RAS with public key encryption, or ellipse encryption. Alternatively, the content management program 1 1 1 may be independently installed in the personal computer 1, for example, and implemented on hardware in which the personal computer 1 cannot directly read the content management program 111 itself. Also, the hardware that implements the content management program 111 can be made resistant to damping. One of the above-mentioned series of processes can also be implemented by hardware or software. In the case where a series of processing is performed by software, the program constituting the software can be installed by a program storage medium on a computer that is assembled in a dedicated / hard 11 ^, or by installing various programs,-can implement various Examples of functions include a personal computer for general use. The program storage medium, which is installed on a computer and stores a program that can be implemented by the computer, is shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3. It is composed of: disk 41 or 91 (including a floppy disk), CD 42 or 92 ( Includes 00-ROM (Compact Disc-Read Only Memory) '' DVD (Digital Cersatile Disc), optical disk 43 or 93 (including MD (Mini-Disc)), or a package formed by semiconductor memory 44 or 94, etc. The media or program is temporarily or permanently stored in ROM 12 or 62, or HDD 21 or 71. As needed, the program can be stored in the program storage medium through the interface of the communication department 25 or 73, using the local area network or the Internet 2 or the wired or wireless communication medium of digital satellite broadcasting. Also, in this detailed manual, the steps of describing the program stored in the program storage medium can of course follow the recorded order and be time-sequentially covered by the paper standard in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 standard (210 X 297). Li) ------------- ^ -------- ^ -------- • Line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -76 -Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 -____ B7 V. Description of Invention (74) for processing. However, it is not necessarily processed in time series, but also includes processing executed in parallel or individually. In this detailed description, the term "system" refers to the entire device including a plurality of devices. [Effects of the invention] In the information processing device described in item 1 of the patent application scope, the information processing method described in item 2 of the patent application scope, and the program storage medium described in item 3 of the patent application scope, is the first content The checkout is judged, and whether the second content is checked out is determined. In the case where it is determined that the first content and the second content have not been checked out, the combination of the first content and the second content will not harm the use. The power of the user can be combined with the content while preventing the use of inappropriate content. For example, in the information processing device described in item 4 of the scope of patent application, the information processing method described in item 5 of the scope of patent application, and the program storage medium described in item 6 of the scope of patent application, whether the content is checked out is determined, It is judged that the content is not checked out, and the content is divided, which will not undermine the power of the user. It can also prevent the use of inappropriate content and divide the content. [Brief description of the drawing] Fig. 1 is a diagram showing an embodiment of a music data management system of the present invention. — Figure 2 is a diagram illustrating the composition of the personal computer 1. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 public love) ------------- ^ ----- --- ^-I ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) -77- B7 B7 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives ix Invention Description (75) Figure 3 This is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the EMD registration server 3. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the personal computer 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of data of use conditions. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the display materials ^ 4 201 of the original package belonging to the display data file 1 82 and the content files 丨 6 丨 _1 to 16i_n. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the display data file 182. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display material 24 1 for my kit and the content files 1 6 1 -1 to 161 · N. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display data 28 1 for the filter kit and the content files 1 6 1 -1 to 161-N. Figure 10 is a diagram illustrating the processing of the eMU login. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a screen for performing registration processing. Figure 1 2 shows an example of the screen displayed by the EMD selection program 1 3 1 〇 Figure 1 3 shows an example of the screen displayed by the purchase application 15 1. Fig. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed by a purchase driver 1 4 1 〇 Fig. 15 is an example diagram showing a display operation instruction window. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a window displayed on the display 20 by the recording program 113. FIG. Fig. 17 is a diagram showing a property dialog box for setting other options of WWW5-1 or 5-2. A figure 18 shows the attributes of the choice of setting WWW5-1 or 5-2. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm). I — I — I — — — — — — — — · IIIIIII ^ «— — — — — III (Please read the notes on the back? Matters before filling out this page) -78- V. Description of the invention (76 ^ inch block diagram. Figure 1 9 shows the recording program 11 3 Make the window displayed on the display 20 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Example Picture ® 20 is a description of the recording program 1 1 3 Example of the window displayed on the display 20. Figure 2 1 Description An example of the dialog box of the recording program 1 1 3 displayed on the display 20. Fig. 22 illustrates an example of the dialog box of the recording program η 3 displayed on the display 20. Η 23 is an illustration of the recording program u 3 displayed on the display. An example of the dialog box of 20.…-Figure 24 is an example of a window showing the recording program u3 displayed on the display 20. Figure 25 is an example of a window showing the recording program u3 displayed on the display 20. Figure 26 is a description of the recording program 1 丨 3 dialog box displayed on the display 20 Figure 461. Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau's Employees' Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Figure 27 is an example of a display and operation instruction window. Figure 28 is an example of a display and operation instruction window. Figure 29 is an example of a display and operation instruction window Fig. 30 is an example of a display operation instruction window. Fig. 31 is an example of a display operation instruction window. Fig. 32 is an example of a display-display operation instruction window. Fig. 33 is a display operation instruction window. For example, the paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -79- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economy A? ^ -----— B7___ 31. Description of the invention (77) Fig. 34 is an example of a display operation instruction window. Fig. 35 is a processing diagram illustrating the generation of a filter kit. Fig. 36 is an example of a display operation instruction window. Fig. 37 is an example of a display operation instruction window. Figure 3. Figure 8 shows an example of the operation instruction window. Figure 39 shows an example of the operation instruction window. Figure 40 shows an example of the operation instruction window. Figure 4 1 shows the display operation. Instruction An example of a window. Fig. 42 is an example of a display operation instruction window. Fig. 4 is an example of a display operation instruction window. Fig. 44 is an example of a display window of Gu Zong 111. 'Fig. 45 is a display display An example of an operation instruction window. Figure 46 is a flowchart illustrating the registration process. Figure 47 is a flowchart illustrating the recording process from a CD. Figure 48 is a flowchart illustrating the process of obtaining information corresponding to the CD. Figure 49 is an explanation Flow chart of the record processing of the data of display data file 182. Fig. 50 is a flowchart illustrating the process of reading data from the display data file 182. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating the generation process of the filter suite. Fig. 52 is a flowchart illustrating the checkout or check-in process. Fig. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an image sticking process. Fig. 54 is a flowchart showing a process of displaying a J-month image. Fig. 55 is a flowchart illustrating a combination process of contents. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) ---------------- I ---- ^ · 11! 1111 (Please read the back first Please pay attention to this page and fill in this page again) -80- Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 501058 A7 B7_ V. Description of Invention (78) Figure 57 is a flowchart illustrating the processing when the portable device 6-1 is connected. [Description of the labels] 1-1, 1-2: Personal computer, 2: Network, 3: EMD registration server, 6- 1 to 6-4: Portable device, 11: CPU, 12 ROM, '13: RAM, 21: HDD, 41: magnetic disk, 42: optical disk, 4 3: optical disk, 44: semiconductor memory , 61: CPU, 62: ROM, 63: RAM, 71: HDD, 91 ·· disk, 92: optical disk, 93: optical disk, this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 > < 297 mm) n I— nlnnnnnn II nnnnnnn 1 ° JI n ϋ nnnnn I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 81-501058 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (79 4 9 Guide to body memory The formula, process, and formula show, the formula refers to, the library process is the operation of the material selection management process, the selection and display of the audio content, the internal recording of the DM to the compaction, and the use of a certificate code to report the pressure of the California Department, ., Programmatic I-type Cheng Chengzhi, Tube Replacement, Replacement Specialist, Presenting 47 ef-Gri iua i-1 / Result-type Piece Management \ Square Equation Tube-type Cheng Cheng

器 動 區 辱 用 D (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 購購過顯圖履認過 口吝 晉 口貧 口¾ 動動 區 區 用用 入入 檔檔 檔，。 料料，料鍵料 資資檔資用資 濾示像歷證濾 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -82-Device D (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed and purchased the photo, identified the mouth, Jinkou poor mouth ¾ used by the mobile area Into the file. Material, material key material, material file, material, material, material, material, material, material, material, material, material, material, material, material, etc. This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -82-

Claims (1)

A8B8C8D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 1 · 一種資訊處理裝置，其特徵爲包含： 判定第1內容是否被結帳之第1判定手段；以及 判疋第2內谷是否被結帳之第2判定手段；以及 在被判定前述第1內容與前述第2內容皆未被結帳之 情形’結合前述第1內容與前述第2內容之結合手段。 2·—種資訊處理方法，其特徵爲包含： 判定第1內容是否被結帳之第1判定步驟；以及 判定第2內容是否被結帳之第2判定步驟；以及 在被判定前述第1內容與前述第2內容皆未被結帳之 情形’結合前述第1內容與前述第2內容之結合步驟。 一一....____________ 3 —種程式收容媒體，其特徵爲收容： 以包含：判定第1內容是否被結帳之第1判定步驟； 以及 判定第2內容是否被結帳之第2判定步驟；以及 在被判定前述第1內容與前述第2內容皆未被結帳之 情形’結合前述第1內容與前述第2內容之結合步驟爲特 徵之電腦可以讀取之程式。 4 · 一種資訊處理裝置，其特徵爲包含： 判定內容是否被結帳之判定手段；以及 在被判定前述內容未被結帳之情形，分割前述內容之 分割手段。 5 · —種資訊處理方法，其特徵爲包含： 判定內容是否被結帳之判定步驟；以及 在被判定前述內容未被結帳之情形，分割前述內容之 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -------------^--------^----I I---^ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫木頁) -83 - 501058 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 分割步驟。 6 · —種程式收容媒體，其特徵爲收容： 以包含：判定內容是否被結帳之判定步驟；以及 在被判定前述內容未被結帳之情形，分割前述內容之 分割步驟爲特徵之電腦可以讀取之程式。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準（CNS)A4規格（210 X 297公釐） -84-A8B8C8D8 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Scope of Patent Application1. An information processing device that includes: the first determination means to determine whether the first content is billed; and whether the second inner valley is determined The second determination means of the settlement; and the combination means of combining the first content and the second content when it is determined that the first content and the second content have not been settled. 2. · An information processing method, comprising: a first determination step for determining whether the first content is checked out; and a second determination step for determining whether the second content is checked out; and when the first content is determined The procedure of combining the aforementioned first content with the aforementioned second content in the case where the aforementioned second content is not settled. One by one ......____________ 3 — A program storage medium characterized by containing: including: a first determination step to determine whether the first content is checked out; and a second determination step to determine whether the second content is checked out ; And a program that can be read by a computer characterized by a combination of the steps of combining the first and second contents when it is judged that the first and second contents have not been settled. 4. An information processing device, comprising: a judgment means for judging whether the content is checked out; and a division means for dividing the aforementioned content when it is judged that the aforementioned content has not been checked out. 5 · An information processing method, comprising: a determination step for determining whether the content is checked out; and in the case where it is determined that the foregoing content has not been checked out, the paper standard for dividing the foregoing content applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ------------- ^ -------- ^ ---- I I --- ^ (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in the wooden pages again) -83-501058 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Steps to divide the scope of patent application. 6 · A program storage medium, which is characterized in that it contains: a determination step that includes: determining whether the content is checked out; and a computer that is characterized by a division step that divides the foregoing content when it is determined that the foregoing content is not checked out Read the program. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is sized for China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -84-
TW89126393A 1999-12-17 2000-12-11 Data processing device and method, and program recording medium TW501058B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP35840799 1999-12-17
JP2000326653A JP4340944B2 (en) 1999-12-17 2000-10-26 Information processing apparatus and method, and program storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW501058B true TW501058B (en) 2002-09-01

Family

ID=26580784

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW89126393A TW501058B (en) 1999-12-17 2000-12-11 Data processing device and method, and program recording medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4340944B2 (en)
TW (1) TW501058B (en)

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3818505B2 (en) * 2002-04-15 2006-09-06 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus and method, and program
JP3818503B2 (en) * 2002-04-15 2006-09-06 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus and method, and program
JP3818504B2 (en) * 2002-04-15 2006-09-06 ソニー株式会社 Information processing apparatus and method, and program
JP4391056B2 (en) 2002-04-15 2009-12-24 ソニー株式会社 Information management apparatus and method, recording medium, and program
JP2006004332A (en) * 2004-06-21 2006-01-05 Sony Corp Content storing method
JP4697152B2 (en) * 2007-01-26 2011-06-08 ソニー株式会社 Information management apparatus, information management method, recording medium, and program

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP4340944B2 (en) 2009-10-07
JP2001236080A (en) 2001-08-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR100707326B1 (en) Information processing system, information processing apparatus, and information processing method
JP4325102B2 (en) Information processing apparatus and method, and program storage medium
TWI227423B (en) Device and method for processing information, and computer readable storage medium
JP2001236081A (en) Information processor, information processing method and program storage medium
TW501058B (en) Data processing device and method, and program recording medium
TW523708B (en) Data processing device, method therefor and program storage media
KR20030047559A (en) System for production and regeneration of encrypted file regardless of a media players
KR20010102179A (en) Method and apparatus for information processing, and medium for storing program
US8407467B2 (en) Ubiquitous audio reproducing and servicing method and apparatus
JP4211163B2 (en) Information processing apparatus and method, and program storage medium
TW565794B (en) Data processing device and method and program storage media
JP4524707B2 (en) Information processing device
MXPA01006990A (en) Information processor and processing method, and information storage medium
MXPA01006842A (en) Method and apparatus for information processing, and medium for storing information
MXPA01006983A (en) Information processor and processing method, and information storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees